66
LEGEND BUI WI NGS DESIGNATION ARTS/ADMINISTRATION A LG - LOWER GROVIVO FLOOR u - GRDl/No FLOOR I," FIRST FLOOR ADMINISTRATION CLASSICS COMMUNITY PROGRAMMES COMPUTING CENTRE ENGLISH HERSU HISTORY LINGUISTICS MODERN LANGUAGES PHILOSOPHY LG,G&I LG LG G I I LG I G UNIVERSITY COUNSELLING SERVICE MAIN LECTURE THEATRE GEOLOGY I LG B C o E G H J L M N P PHYSICS LECTURE THEATRE CHEMISTRY BASDEN THEATRE 'BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES AUCHMUTY LIBRARY ,METALLURGY ARCHITECTURE DRAMA THEATRE SOCIAL SCIENCES EOGRAPHY L TEMPORARY BUILDINGS MEDICINE MATHEMATICS DRAMA BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES EDUCATION PSYCHOLOGY SOCIOLOGY ENGINEERING COMPLEX CHEMICAL ENGINEERING CIVIL ENGINEERING UNION ICAL ENGINEERING ICAL ENGINEERING ERING THEATRE SSROOMS CHAPLAINCY SERVICE HEALTH SERVICE OVERSEAS STUDENTS ADVISER t S S S T T V V W W W W @[F -- -- -- -- -- NEWCASTLE OF ADVANCED FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE HANDBOOK 1977 THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE NEW SOUTH WALES 2308 ISSN 0312 -9985 Telephone - Newcastle 680401 One Dollar

ARTS/ADMINISTRATION A LG I, FIRST FLOOR GRDl/No FLOOR

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    3

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

LEGEND BUI WI NGS DESIGNATION

ARTSADMINISTRATION A LG - LOWER GROVIVO FLOOR u - GRDlNo FLOOR I FIRST FLOOR

ADMINISTRATION CLASSICS COMMUNITY PROGRAMMES COMPUTING CENTRE ENGLISH HERSU HISTORY LINGUISTICS MODERN LANGUAGES PHILOSOPHY

LGGampI LG LG

G I I

LG I G

UNIVERSITY COUNSELLING SERVICE MAIN LECTURE THEATRE GEOLOGY

I LG B C o E G H J L M N P

PHYSICS LECTURE THEATRE CHEMISTRY BASDEN THEATRE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES AUCHMUTY LIBRARY

METALLURGY ARCHITECTURE DRAMA THEATRE SOCIAL SCIENCES

EOGRAPHY

L TEMPORARY BUILDINGS

MEDICINE MATHEMATICS

DRAMA BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES

EDUCATION PSYCHOLOGY SOCIOLOGY

ENGINEERING COMPLEX CHEMICAL ENGINEERING CIVIL ENGINEERING

UNION

ICAL ENGINEERING ICAL ENGINEERING

ERING THEATRE SSROOMS

CHAPLAINCY SERVICE HEALTH SERVICE OVERSEAS STUDENTS

ADVISER

t

R~ S S S T T V V W W W W

il1Hl~ _~mw [F ~pound~1l1L~ ~~W ~M1iOO Wli[~~

----------

NEWCASTLE OF ADVANCED

FACULTY OF

ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE

HANDBOOK 1977

THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE

NEW SOUTH WALES 2308 ISSN 0312 -9985

Telephone - Newcastle 680401

One Dollar

CONTENTS

Faculty of Economics and Commerce The colour band on the spine of this Handbook is the lining colour of the

hood worn by Bachelors of Commerce of this University

Page 5 8 9 9

10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12

Faculty staff Information for new undergraduates Prnfessional recognition Advisory prerequisites for entry to the faculty Student - Participation in university affairs

Academic progress Problems

Examination results - Assessment Review

Institute of Industrial Economics Newcastle University Society of Economics It Commerce Students Legal Studies Club Undergnoduate Courses

11 Bachelor of Commerce - Degree Requirements 15 Advice to enrolling students 16 Scbedule A - Ordinary Degree 17 Honours Degreemiddot 18 Equivalent Honours 19 Schedule B 20 Prerequisite conditions 21 Conditions for granting of standing - Undergraduates 23 Graduates 24 Transition arrangements 26 Combined Degree Coones 33 Bachelor of Et1conomics - Degree Requirements 3S Advice to enrolling students 37 Schedule A - Ordinary Degree 38 38 39 40 42 43 44 4S 47 47 48 49 52 55 S5

57 86

119 132

Honours Degree Schedule B

Prerequisite conditions Conditions for granting of standing - Undergraduates

Graduates Postgraduate Courses Diploma in Business Studies Requirements

Appendix Explanatory notes Conditions for granting of standing Transitional arrangements

Master of Commerce DoctOr of Philosophy Degree Requirements Doctor of Science Guide to subject entries Departmental Entries Department of Commerce Department of Economics Department of Legal Studies Major subjects from other faculties

3

Faculty of Economics and Commerce Dean Professor M O Jager

Sub-Dean W A G Enright

Faculty Secretary F C Hawkins

Faculty Attendant N Allen

Heads of Departments Commerce Professor M O Jager

Economics Professor C A Tisdell

Legal Studies Professor K E Lindgren (on leave) C S Enright (Acting Head)

Telephone Enquiries The University telephone number is Newcastle 680401

1977 Enrolments Telephone enquiries regarding enrolment in 1977 in the Faculty of Economics and Commerce should be directed to Mr F C Hawkins Faculty Secretary extension 565 or dial 68 5565

COMMERCE Professors M O Jager BCom(Melbourne) FASA (Head of Department) A J Williams BCom(Tasmania) BEd (Melbourne) PhD(Westem

Australia) DipEd(Tasmania) GradDipAdrriin(WAIT) AASA MACE

Associate Professor B T Colditz F ASA ACIS FTII

Senior Lecturers E J Burke BCom(New South WaI~s) MA(Leeds) MSA G EFerris BSc(Sydney amp Adelaide) MSc(Sydney) MA(Colu~bia) R W Gibbins BCom(Queensland) ACA M E Spautz MA PhD(CaIifornia (Los Angelesraquo R B Taylor BCom DipPubAd(Sydney) AASA(senior)

Lecturers I R Beaman BSc(New South WaIes) DiplndEng D M Gilling BCom MCA(Victoria (Wellingtonraquo ACA(NZ) AASA F F W Guilhaus BA(Sydney) MBA(McGilI) DipEd(Sydney) D S Karpin BCom(New South Wales) MBA(Rochester) AASA D J McKee BEc(Sydney) AASA W Motyka MCom(New South Wales) AASA(Prov) B P OShea BCom(New South Wales) AASA R G Piggott MAgSc(New England) PhD(Comei1) G F Rooney BCom AASA(Senior) ACIS J R Smyrk MEc(Monash) I G Wallschutzky BCom DipBusStud AASA(Senior)

S

Senior Tutors P J Best BCom(Queensland) Ellen M Braye BCom BA G R Dowling BCom DipBusStud AASA(Senior) M J Tippett BCom

Tutor Demonstrator R J Craig BCom AASA(Senior)

Part-time Tutors L A Brien BCom ACA L J Caldwell BCom AASA(Senior) ACIS D R Forsythe BCom K M Graham BCom AASA ACIS H Lunney AASA ACIS H S McKensey BCom FCA G Mitchell MCom AASA ACIS M J Zugai BCom

Departmental Office Staff L R Bartlett Judith L Campbell Maxine J Zerafa

Professors B L Johns MA(Cambridge)

ECONOMICS

C A Tisdell BCom(New South Wales) PhD(Australian National) (Head of Department)

Associate Professor B L J Gordon MBe(Sydney) PhD

Senior Lecturers C J Aislabie MBe(Sydney) Php(London) N J Dickinson BCom(New South Wales) PhD S N Jacobi AB(Princeton) MA(South Carolina) R W McShane BA(New England) MA(Alberta) W J Sheehan BBe(Sydney) MA P W Sherwood BCom(London)

Lecturers Paula R Anderson BA MCom DipEd(New South Wales) J C de Castro Lopo MA(Wisconsin) H W Dick BBe(Monash) MBe(Australian National) J A Doeleman Drs(Nederlandse Beonomische Hogeschool Rotterdam) W C Dunlop BA(Aucklantl) MCom J R Fisher BA PhD(Hull) P C Ip BS (Illinois) PhD (Western Ontario) G R Keating MEc(New England) R R Piggott MAgEc(New England) PhD (Cornell) C W Stahl BA(California State College) PhD(California) P J C Stanton MA DipEd(Sydney) V G Taylor BEc(Monash) B A Twohill BA Sarah S Waterman AB(Brown) MA(Hist amp Beons) (California)

Senior Tutors C J Bowers MCom D K MacDonald BA MCom

6

Departmental Office Staff Aileen M Rowley Elizabeth Williams Sheila Savage J A G~ Tobin

LEGAL STUDIES Professor K E Lindgren BA(New South Wales) LLB(London) MA PhD

Lecturers G Cowper-Hill LLB(Bristol) C S Enright LLB(Sydney) BA D W Mitchell BA LLB(Australian National University) T Presbury LLB(Sydney) BCom DipBusStud R N Watterson LLM(Sydney)

Senior Tutor W A G Enright BA(Sydney) LLB(London)

Departmental Office Staff Diane Wratten

7

Information for New Undergraduates

Students entering University for the first time may experience some difficulty in adapting to the study techniques required for success It is therefore important for the students to become familiar with the methods of organisation used within the University degree courses available and the University Counselling Service which offers assistshyance with study and personal problems The following reference books will be useful -

1 University Calendar This contains all the formal information about the By-Laws and Regulations governing courses and genershyal organisation

2 Faculty Handbooks These are issued by each Faculty and proshyvide information about the degree and special requirements

3 General Supplement to the Faculty Handbooks which contains details of administrative requirements and amenities and services

Students should note that it is possible to include some major streams of study in more than one degree course eg Commerce Economics Mathematics Psychology It is therefore important that care is taken to ensure a degree course is selected which will allow the inclusion of the full range of studies they wish to undertake

In 1977 the Faculty of Economics and Commerce will offer Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Economics degree courses Both degree courses offer a student the opportunity to select subjects from various disciplines offered within the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and in other faculties of the University provided certain constraints and prerequisite conditions stipulated in the degree reshyquirements are complied with Advice regarding the structure of both degrees will be given to all incoming students before enrolment at lectures given on enrolment days

Many students do not finally decide their chosen field of interest until after the first year of study However the initial seleotion of subjects should be made in light of the probable direction of their later interests and studies eltg students who have an interest in accounting or industrial relations should include Legal Studies I early in their programme

Students should study carefully the requirements for the degrees particularly with regard to compulsory subjects limitation of subjects chosen from each group and prerequisite requirements including the advisory prerequisites set out in the section Advice to Enrolling Stushydents It will be necessary for students who have not completed advisory prerequisites or equivalent study to undertake intensive preliminary reading

Limits are also set on the number of subjects students are permitted to take in anyone year These limits restrict a full-time student to

8

a maximum of four subjeots and part-time students to a maximum of two subjects in anyone year of study (Refer conditions set out in Schedule A of the Degree Requirements)

Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subshyjects in the course should seek help from members of the Faculty For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students consult the University Counselling Service (see relevant section in General Supplement)

Enquiries regarding enrolment variation to programme and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary Mr F C Hawkins Administration Building Room G72

Professioaal Recognition

The Australian Society of Accountants will exempt from the qualifyshying examination of the Society graduates of the University of Newshycastle who hold the Bachelor of Commerce degree and who have included certain specified subjects in their degree programme The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and the Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators also grant exemption from certain examinations for passes in particular subjects in the degree course or in the Diploma in Business Studies

Registration as a registered public accountant under the Public Acshycountants Registration Act 1945 (NSW) is also available to graduates who have included specified subjects in their Bachelor of Commerce degree programme

A pass in the subject of Taxation is accepted as a prerequisite for registration as a tax agent by the Tax Agents Board (NSW)

Examination requirements for advancement to Senior Associate status in the Australian Society of Accountants may be satisfied by including certain subjects in the Diploma in Business Studies the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree or the Master of Commerce

Particulars of these various exemptions are set out on notice boards in the Department of Commerce

Further enquiries and eventual applications for exemption should be directed to the professional associations concerned

Advisory Prereqnisite for Entry to the Faculty

In addition to satisfying the matriculation requirements of the Unishyversity candidates applying for entry to the FacuIty of Economics and Commerce are advised that a pass in 2 unit Mathematics at the

9

New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination or an examination at an equivalent standard in Mathematics is advisable

Candidates should note that there is no other advisory prerequisite for entry to the Faculty of Economics and Commerce It is not necessary for candidates applying for entry to have previously studied either Economics Accounting or Legal Studies

Student Participation in University Mairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as representatives to departmental meetings in the Departments of Economics Comshymerce and Legal Studies to the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce as well as to other university bodies Elections of representatives usually take place early in the first term and students should watch Department notice boards for details of Student Representative Elections

Student Academic Progress

All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory proshygress and in particular attention is drawn to By-laws 541 and 542 (refer to the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook) The following points on Faculty Board policy should also be borne in mind

1 The Faculty Board in terms of By-law 5412 requires that students shall pass at least one subject in their first year of fullshytime attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance

Students who fail to meet this requirement shall be referred to the Admissions Committee with a recommendation that they be excluded from the faculty or from the University

2 For the purposes of By-law 5422 the Faculty Board has determined that at least four subjects be passed at the end of the first two years of full-time attendance or at least five subjects be passed at the end of the first four years of part-time attendance

3 Faculty Board has further decided in terms of By-law 5412 that if in any year following the completion of two years fullshytime attendance or four years part-time attendance a students academic record since enrolment includes more failures than passes then the progress of that student shall be reviewed by the Faculty Board which may determine that such a student shall

(a) be permitted to re-enrol only in such subject or subjects as the Faculty Board shall specify

OR

10

(b) be referred to the Admissions Committee with a reComshymendation for exclusion from the Faculty or from the Unishyversity

For the purposes of this section a failure in a repeated subject shall count as a second failure

Any Iltudent who has been recommended to the Admissions Comshymittee for exclusion will have an opportunity to present a case why he should not be excluded

Student Problems

Members of the Faculty are willing to offer advice and assistance to students who have academic problems Where a problem clearly lies within the area of responsibility of some particular member of the teaching staff it is preferable that the matter be discussed initially with that member

A student may also find it helpful to discuss his problem with a student member of Faculty Board particularly if the student is reluctant to make a personal approach to a member of staff or is uncertain of the proper procedures to be followed

Assessment of Examination Results

In normal circumstances no contact may be made by or on behalf of a student with a member of the academic staff on the subject of a students examination script(s) between the date of the examinshyation in question and the official publication of results

Review of Examination Results

Examination results may be reviewed for a charge of $800 per subject which is refundable in the event of an error being discovershyed Students are advised that inter alia marginal failures are autoshymatically reviewed before publication of results Applications for review must be submitted on the appropriate form together with the prescribed review charge by the date notified in the publication of results

Institute of Industrial Economics

The Institute of Industrial Economics was established in April 1976 and is the first research institute within the University

It conducts research into the economic problems of Australian manushyfacturing industry the distributing and service trades and the mineral industry The Institute also acts as a centre for postgraduate train-

11

ing and research in the field of industrial economics where it colshylaborates closely with the Department of Economics Seminars and conferences are arranged from time to time and publications issued which report the results of the Institutes research programme

The University staff members who work for the Institute are mainly drawn from the Departments of Economics Commerce and Legal Studies However staff members from other departments of the University can be called upon to assist in particular projects

Many of the staff working for the Institute have previously acted as advisors or consultants of industry commerce and government The Institute also employs full-time research fellows and research assisshytants to meet the requirements of its research and consulting activities

The Board which administers the Institute consists of members from industry commerce and the University The Chairman of the Board is Sir Bede Callaghan CBE HonDSc FBIA F AIM The Director of the Institute is Professor B L Johns of the Department of Economics

Newcasde University Society of

Economics and Commerce Students

This is the Society designed to cater especially for the interests of students studying Economics Membership is open to all students and staff Each year an extensive programme of discussions lectures by prominent visitors and social events is organised

The managing committee of the Society is made up of representatives elected from each group (including first year) Enquiries concerning membership should be directed to the representatives of each group early in first term

Legal Studies Club

This club is designed to promote the study of and interest in law and it caters especially for the interests of students enrolled in courses offered by the Department of Legal Studies In previous years a programme of moots social events and leotures by prominent visitors was organised

The Club did not function in 1976 and it is suggested that students interested in reforming the Club meet early in the first term to elect officers and formulate a programme for the year

12

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF COMMERCE

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Commerce may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 Sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Accounting IV Economics IV and Legal Studies IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year the eighth Monday in first term

(li) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subje~t passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved tertiary institutions

13

work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 he minimum time f~r a course qualifying for an ordinary degree IS three years except tn those cases where candidates are granted standing

9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in (i) Economics

Oi) Accounting (iii) Legal Studies

(c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I Class II and Class IlL Class II shall have two divisions namely - Division I and Division II

10 (a)

(b)

II (a)

(b)

Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme Prior to entering Accounting IV Economics -IV or Legal Studies IV candidates for honours must pass all the prescribed subjects at a standard prescribed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head ofthe Department concerned

To qualify for the degree a candidate shall pass the subjects selected in conformity with the conditions set out in Schedule A to these Requirements The qualifying subjects for the degree shall be those listed in Schedule B to these Requirements

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may complete the Requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree in conjunction with another approved degree

2 Details of combined degree courses approved by the Faculty Board are set out on pages 26 et seq

14

by completing a combined course approved by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the other appropriate Faculty Board provided that

(i) Admission to a combined course shall normally be at the end of the first year and shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two Faculties concerned

(ii) Admission to combined courses will be restricted to students with an average of at least Credit level

(iii) The Deans of both Faculties after consultation with the Head(s) of Department(s) concerned shall certify that the work in the combined degree is no less in quantity and quality than if the two degrees were taken separately

(iv) An approved combined course shall satisfy the requirements of both degrees

13 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any requirement

Advice to Enrolling Students

Before enrolling in any subject leading to the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree all students should carefully note the following

I A student who has enrolled under degree requirements prior to 1973 may not enrol in any subject without first consulting the Faculty Secretary

2 The Dean in the application of conditions 5 and 6 of Schedule A may approve enrolment of a student in good standing in one additional subject in anyone year in the cases of (a) A student seeking to enrol in the final year of the course

who will graduate if he passes five subjects in the case of a full-time student or three subjects in the case of a part-time student

(b) A part-time student (other than one to whom the preceding paragraph (a) applies) seeking to enrol in a third or later year who has passed four subjects in the first two years of enrolment as a part-time student and who has not subseqentIy failed a subject

3 In addition to the compulsory prerequisites listed on p 20 students should note that (a) Economics I is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Introductory

Quantitative Methods (b) Economics II is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Money

and Banking (c) Legal Studies I is an advisory prerequisite for Industrial Law

15

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I

CONTENTS

Faculty of Economics and Commerce The colour band on the spine of this Handbook is the lining colour of the

hood worn by Bachelors of Commerce of this University

Page 5 8 9 9

10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12

Faculty staff Information for new undergraduates Prnfessional recognition Advisory prerequisites for entry to the faculty Student - Participation in university affairs

Academic progress Problems

Examination results - Assessment Review

Institute of Industrial Economics Newcastle University Society of Economics It Commerce Students Legal Studies Club Undergnoduate Courses

11 Bachelor of Commerce - Degree Requirements 15 Advice to enrolling students 16 Scbedule A - Ordinary Degree 17 Honours Degreemiddot 18 Equivalent Honours 19 Schedule B 20 Prerequisite conditions 21 Conditions for granting of standing - Undergraduates 23 Graduates 24 Transition arrangements 26 Combined Degree Coones 33 Bachelor of Et1conomics - Degree Requirements 3S Advice to enrolling students 37 Schedule A - Ordinary Degree 38 38 39 40 42 43 44 4S 47 47 48 49 52 55 S5

57 86

119 132

Honours Degree Schedule B

Prerequisite conditions Conditions for granting of standing - Undergraduates

Graduates Postgraduate Courses Diploma in Business Studies Requirements

Appendix Explanatory notes Conditions for granting of standing Transitional arrangements

Master of Commerce DoctOr of Philosophy Degree Requirements Doctor of Science Guide to subject entries Departmental Entries Department of Commerce Department of Economics Department of Legal Studies Major subjects from other faculties

3

Faculty of Economics and Commerce Dean Professor M O Jager

Sub-Dean W A G Enright

Faculty Secretary F C Hawkins

Faculty Attendant N Allen

Heads of Departments Commerce Professor M O Jager

Economics Professor C A Tisdell

Legal Studies Professor K E Lindgren (on leave) C S Enright (Acting Head)

Telephone Enquiries The University telephone number is Newcastle 680401

1977 Enrolments Telephone enquiries regarding enrolment in 1977 in the Faculty of Economics and Commerce should be directed to Mr F C Hawkins Faculty Secretary extension 565 or dial 68 5565

COMMERCE Professors M O Jager BCom(Melbourne) FASA (Head of Department) A J Williams BCom(Tasmania) BEd (Melbourne) PhD(Westem

Australia) DipEd(Tasmania) GradDipAdrriin(WAIT) AASA MACE

Associate Professor B T Colditz F ASA ACIS FTII

Senior Lecturers E J Burke BCom(New South WaI~s) MA(Leeds) MSA G EFerris BSc(Sydney amp Adelaide) MSc(Sydney) MA(Colu~bia) R W Gibbins BCom(Queensland) ACA M E Spautz MA PhD(CaIifornia (Los Angelesraquo R B Taylor BCom DipPubAd(Sydney) AASA(senior)

Lecturers I R Beaman BSc(New South WaIes) DiplndEng D M Gilling BCom MCA(Victoria (Wellingtonraquo ACA(NZ) AASA F F W Guilhaus BA(Sydney) MBA(McGilI) DipEd(Sydney) D S Karpin BCom(New South Wales) MBA(Rochester) AASA D J McKee BEc(Sydney) AASA W Motyka MCom(New South Wales) AASA(Prov) B P OShea BCom(New South Wales) AASA R G Piggott MAgSc(New England) PhD(Comei1) G F Rooney BCom AASA(Senior) ACIS J R Smyrk MEc(Monash) I G Wallschutzky BCom DipBusStud AASA(Senior)

S

Senior Tutors P J Best BCom(Queensland) Ellen M Braye BCom BA G R Dowling BCom DipBusStud AASA(Senior) M J Tippett BCom

Tutor Demonstrator R J Craig BCom AASA(Senior)

Part-time Tutors L A Brien BCom ACA L J Caldwell BCom AASA(Senior) ACIS D R Forsythe BCom K M Graham BCom AASA ACIS H Lunney AASA ACIS H S McKensey BCom FCA G Mitchell MCom AASA ACIS M J Zugai BCom

Departmental Office Staff L R Bartlett Judith L Campbell Maxine J Zerafa

Professors B L Johns MA(Cambridge)

ECONOMICS

C A Tisdell BCom(New South Wales) PhD(Australian National) (Head of Department)

Associate Professor B L J Gordon MBe(Sydney) PhD

Senior Lecturers C J Aislabie MBe(Sydney) Php(London) N J Dickinson BCom(New South Wales) PhD S N Jacobi AB(Princeton) MA(South Carolina) R W McShane BA(New England) MA(Alberta) W J Sheehan BBe(Sydney) MA P W Sherwood BCom(London)

Lecturers Paula R Anderson BA MCom DipEd(New South Wales) J C de Castro Lopo MA(Wisconsin) H W Dick BBe(Monash) MBe(Australian National) J A Doeleman Drs(Nederlandse Beonomische Hogeschool Rotterdam) W C Dunlop BA(Aucklantl) MCom J R Fisher BA PhD(Hull) P C Ip BS (Illinois) PhD (Western Ontario) G R Keating MEc(New England) R R Piggott MAgEc(New England) PhD (Cornell) C W Stahl BA(California State College) PhD(California) P J C Stanton MA DipEd(Sydney) V G Taylor BEc(Monash) B A Twohill BA Sarah S Waterman AB(Brown) MA(Hist amp Beons) (California)

Senior Tutors C J Bowers MCom D K MacDonald BA MCom

6

Departmental Office Staff Aileen M Rowley Elizabeth Williams Sheila Savage J A G~ Tobin

LEGAL STUDIES Professor K E Lindgren BA(New South Wales) LLB(London) MA PhD

Lecturers G Cowper-Hill LLB(Bristol) C S Enright LLB(Sydney) BA D W Mitchell BA LLB(Australian National University) T Presbury LLB(Sydney) BCom DipBusStud R N Watterson LLM(Sydney)

Senior Tutor W A G Enright BA(Sydney) LLB(London)

Departmental Office Staff Diane Wratten

7

Information for New Undergraduates

Students entering University for the first time may experience some difficulty in adapting to the study techniques required for success It is therefore important for the students to become familiar with the methods of organisation used within the University degree courses available and the University Counselling Service which offers assistshyance with study and personal problems The following reference books will be useful -

1 University Calendar This contains all the formal information about the By-Laws and Regulations governing courses and genershyal organisation

2 Faculty Handbooks These are issued by each Faculty and proshyvide information about the degree and special requirements

3 General Supplement to the Faculty Handbooks which contains details of administrative requirements and amenities and services

Students should note that it is possible to include some major streams of study in more than one degree course eg Commerce Economics Mathematics Psychology It is therefore important that care is taken to ensure a degree course is selected which will allow the inclusion of the full range of studies they wish to undertake

In 1977 the Faculty of Economics and Commerce will offer Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Economics degree courses Both degree courses offer a student the opportunity to select subjects from various disciplines offered within the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and in other faculties of the University provided certain constraints and prerequisite conditions stipulated in the degree reshyquirements are complied with Advice regarding the structure of both degrees will be given to all incoming students before enrolment at lectures given on enrolment days

Many students do not finally decide their chosen field of interest until after the first year of study However the initial seleotion of subjects should be made in light of the probable direction of their later interests and studies eltg students who have an interest in accounting or industrial relations should include Legal Studies I early in their programme

Students should study carefully the requirements for the degrees particularly with regard to compulsory subjects limitation of subjects chosen from each group and prerequisite requirements including the advisory prerequisites set out in the section Advice to Enrolling Stushydents It will be necessary for students who have not completed advisory prerequisites or equivalent study to undertake intensive preliminary reading

Limits are also set on the number of subjects students are permitted to take in anyone year These limits restrict a full-time student to

8

a maximum of four subjeots and part-time students to a maximum of two subjects in anyone year of study (Refer conditions set out in Schedule A of the Degree Requirements)

Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subshyjects in the course should seek help from members of the Faculty For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students consult the University Counselling Service (see relevant section in General Supplement)

Enquiries regarding enrolment variation to programme and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary Mr F C Hawkins Administration Building Room G72

Professioaal Recognition

The Australian Society of Accountants will exempt from the qualifyshying examination of the Society graduates of the University of Newshycastle who hold the Bachelor of Commerce degree and who have included certain specified subjects in their degree programme The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and the Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators also grant exemption from certain examinations for passes in particular subjects in the degree course or in the Diploma in Business Studies

Registration as a registered public accountant under the Public Acshycountants Registration Act 1945 (NSW) is also available to graduates who have included specified subjects in their Bachelor of Commerce degree programme

A pass in the subject of Taxation is accepted as a prerequisite for registration as a tax agent by the Tax Agents Board (NSW)

Examination requirements for advancement to Senior Associate status in the Australian Society of Accountants may be satisfied by including certain subjects in the Diploma in Business Studies the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree or the Master of Commerce

Particulars of these various exemptions are set out on notice boards in the Department of Commerce

Further enquiries and eventual applications for exemption should be directed to the professional associations concerned

Advisory Prereqnisite for Entry to the Faculty

In addition to satisfying the matriculation requirements of the Unishyversity candidates applying for entry to the FacuIty of Economics and Commerce are advised that a pass in 2 unit Mathematics at the

9

New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination or an examination at an equivalent standard in Mathematics is advisable

Candidates should note that there is no other advisory prerequisite for entry to the Faculty of Economics and Commerce It is not necessary for candidates applying for entry to have previously studied either Economics Accounting or Legal Studies

Student Participation in University Mairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as representatives to departmental meetings in the Departments of Economics Comshymerce and Legal Studies to the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce as well as to other university bodies Elections of representatives usually take place early in the first term and students should watch Department notice boards for details of Student Representative Elections

Student Academic Progress

All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory proshygress and in particular attention is drawn to By-laws 541 and 542 (refer to the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook) The following points on Faculty Board policy should also be borne in mind

1 The Faculty Board in terms of By-law 5412 requires that students shall pass at least one subject in their first year of fullshytime attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance

Students who fail to meet this requirement shall be referred to the Admissions Committee with a recommendation that they be excluded from the faculty or from the University

2 For the purposes of By-law 5422 the Faculty Board has determined that at least four subjects be passed at the end of the first two years of full-time attendance or at least five subjects be passed at the end of the first four years of part-time attendance

3 Faculty Board has further decided in terms of By-law 5412 that if in any year following the completion of two years fullshytime attendance or four years part-time attendance a students academic record since enrolment includes more failures than passes then the progress of that student shall be reviewed by the Faculty Board which may determine that such a student shall

(a) be permitted to re-enrol only in such subject or subjects as the Faculty Board shall specify

OR

10

(b) be referred to the Admissions Committee with a reComshymendation for exclusion from the Faculty or from the Unishyversity

For the purposes of this section a failure in a repeated subject shall count as a second failure

Any Iltudent who has been recommended to the Admissions Comshymittee for exclusion will have an opportunity to present a case why he should not be excluded

Student Problems

Members of the Faculty are willing to offer advice and assistance to students who have academic problems Where a problem clearly lies within the area of responsibility of some particular member of the teaching staff it is preferable that the matter be discussed initially with that member

A student may also find it helpful to discuss his problem with a student member of Faculty Board particularly if the student is reluctant to make a personal approach to a member of staff or is uncertain of the proper procedures to be followed

Assessment of Examination Results

In normal circumstances no contact may be made by or on behalf of a student with a member of the academic staff on the subject of a students examination script(s) between the date of the examinshyation in question and the official publication of results

Review of Examination Results

Examination results may be reviewed for a charge of $800 per subject which is refundable in the event of an error being discovershyed Students are advised that inter alia marginal failures are autoshymatically reviewed before publication of results Applications for review must be submitted on the appropriate form together with the prescribed review charge by the date notified in the publication of results

Institute of Industrial Economics

The Institute of Industrial Economics was established in April 1976 and is the first research institute within the University

It conducts research into the economic problems of Australian manushyfacturing industry the distributing and service trades and the mineral industry The Institute also acts as a centre for postgraduate train-

11

ing and research in the field of industrial economics where it colshylaborates closely with the Department of Economics Seminars and conferences are arranged from time to time and publications issued which report the results of the Institutes research programme

The University staff members who work for the Institute are mainly drawn from the Departments of Economics Commerce and Legal Studies However staff members from other departments of the University can be called upon to assist in particular projects

Many of the staff working for the Institute have previously acted as advisors or consultants of industry commerce and government The Institute also employs full-time research fellows and research assisshytants to meet the requirements of its research and consulting activities

The Board which administers the Institute consists of members from industry commerce and the University The Chairman of the Board is Sir Bede Callaghan CBE HonDSc FBIA F AIM The Director of the Institute is Professor B L Johns of the Department of Economics

Newcasde University Society of

Economics and Commerce Students

This is the Society designed to cater especially for the interests of students studying Economics Membership is open to all students and staff Each year an extensive programme of discussions lectures by prominent visitors and social events is organised

The managing committee of the Society is made up of representatives elected from each group (including first year) Enquiries concerning membership should be directed to the representatives of each group early in first term

Legal Studies Club

This club is designed to promote the study of and interest in law and it caters especially for the interests of students enrolled in courses offered by the Department of Legal Studies In previous years a programme of moots social events and leotures by prominent visitors was organised

The Club did not function in 1976 and it is suggested that students interested in reforming the Club meet early in the first term to elect officers and formulate a programme for the year

12

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF COMMERCE

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Commerce may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 Sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Accounting IV Economics IV and Legal Studies IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year the eighth Monday in first term

(li) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subje~t passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved tertiary institutions

13

work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 he minimum time f~r a course qualifying for an ordinary degree IS three years except tn those cases where candidates are granted standing

9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in (i) Economics

Oi) Accounting (iii) Legal Studies

(c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I Class II and Class IlL Class II shall have two divisions namely - Division I and Division II

10 (a)

(b)

II (a)

(b)

Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme Prior to entering Accounting IV Economics -IV or Legal Studies IV candidates for honours must pass all the prescribed subjects at a standard prescribed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head ofthe Department concerned

To qualify for the degree a candidate shall pass the subjects selected in conformity with the conditions set out in Schedule A to these Requirements The qualifying subjects for the degree shall be those listed in Schedule B to these Requirements

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may complete the Requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree in conjunction with another approved degree

2 Details of combined degree courses approved by the Faculty Board are set out on pages 26 et seq

14

by completing a combined course approved by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the other appropriate Faculty Board provided that

(i) Admission to a combined course shall normally be at the end of the first year and shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two Faculties concerned

(ii) Admission to combined courses will be restricted to students with an average of at least Credit level

(iii) The Deans of both Faculties after consultation with the Head(s) of Department(s) concerned shall certify that the work in the combined degree is no less in quantity and quality than if the two degrees were taken separately

(iv) An approved combined course shall satisfy the requirements of both degrees

13 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any requirement

Advice to Enrolling Students

Before enrolling in any subject leading to the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree all students should carefully note the following

I A student who has enrolled under degree requirements prior to 1973 may not enrol in any subject without first consulting the Faculty Secretary

2 The Dean in the application of conditions 5 and 6 of Schedule A may approve enrolment of a student in good standing in one additional subject in anyone year in the cases of (a) A student seeking to enrol in the final year of the course

who will graduate if he passes five subjects in the case of a full-time student or three subjects in the case of a part-time student

(b) A part-time student (other than one to whom the preceding paragraph (a) applies) seeking to enrol in a third or later year who has passed four subjects in the first two years of enrolment as a part-time student and who has not subseqentIy failed a subject

3 In addition to the compulsory prerequisites listed on p 20 students should note that (a) Economics I is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Introductory

Quantitative Methods (b) Economics II is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Money

and Banking (c) Legal Studies I is an advisory prerequisite for Industrial Law

15

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I

Faculty of Economics and Commerce Dean Professor M O Jager

Sub-Dean W A G Enright

Faculty Secretary F C Hawkins

Faculty Attendant N Allen

Heads of Departments Commerce Professor M O Jager

Economics Professor C A Tisdell

Legal Studies Professor K E Lindgren (on leave) C S Enright (Acting Head)

Telephone Enquiries The University telephone number is Newcastle 680401

1977 Enrolments Telephone enquiries regarding enrolment in 1977 in the Faculty of Economics and Commerce should be directed to Mr F C Hawkins Faculty Secretary extension 565 or dial 68 5565

COMMERCE Professors M O Jager BCom(Melbourne) FASA (Head of Department) A J Williams BCom(Tasmania) BEd (Melbourne) PhD(Westem

Australia) DipEd(Tasmania) GradDipAdrriin(WAIT) AASA MACE

Associate Professor B T Colditz F ASA ACIS FTII

Senior Lecturers E J Burke BCom(New South WaI~s) MA(Leeds) MSA G EFerris BSc(Sydney amp Adelaide) MSc(Sydney) MA(Colu~bia) R W Gibbins BCom(Queensland) ACA M E Spautz MA PhD(CaIifornia (Los Angelesraquo R B Taylor BCom DipPubAd(Sydney) AASA(senior)

Lecturers I R Beaman BSc(New South WaIes) DiplndEng D M Gilling BCom MCA(Victoria (Wellingtonraquo ACA(NZ) AASA F F W Guilhaus BA(Sydney) MBA(McGilI) DipEd(Sydney) D S Karpin BCom(New South Wales) MBA(Rochester) AASA D J McKee BEc(Sydney) AASA W Motyka MCom(New South Wales) AASA(Prov) B P OShea BCom(New South Wales) AASA R G Piggott MAgSc(New England) PhD(Comei1) G F Rooney BCom AASA(Senior) ACIS J R Smyrk MEc(Monash) I G Wallschutzky BCom DipBusStud AASA(Senior)

S

Senior Tutors P J Best BCom(Queensland) Ellen M Braye BCom BA G R Dowling BCom DipBusStud AASA(Senior) M J Tippett BCom

Tutor Demonstrator R J Craig BCom AASA(Senior)

Part-time Tutors L A Brien BCom ACA L J Caldwell BCom AASA(Senior) ACIS D R Forsythe BCom K M Graham BCom AASA ACIS H Lunney AASA ACIS H S McKensey BCom FCA G Mitchell MCom AASA ACIS M J Zugai BCom

Departmental Office Staff L R Bartlett Judith L Campbell Maxine J Zerafa

Professors B L Johns MA(Cambridge)

ECONOMICS

C A Tisdell BCom(New South Wales) PhD(Australian National) (Head of Department)

Associate Professor B L J Gordon MBe(Sydney) PhD

Senior Lecturers C J Aislabie MBe(Sydney) Php(London) N J Dickinson BCom(New South Wales) PhD S N Jacobi AB(Princeton) MA(South Carolina) R W McShane BA(New England) MA(Alberta) W J Sheehan BBe(Sydney) MA P W Sherwood BCom(London)

Lecturers Paula R Anderson BA MCom DipEd(New South Wales) J C de Castro Lopo MA(Wisconsin) H W Dick BBe(Monash) MBe(Australian National) J A Doeleman Drs(Nederlandse Beonomische Hogeschool Rotterdam) W C Dunlop BA(Aucklantl) MCom J R Fisher BA PhD(Hull) P C Ip BS (Illinois) PhD (Western Ontario) G R Keating MEc(New England) R R Piggott MAgEc(New England) PhD (Cornell) C W Stahl BA(California State College) PhD(California) P J C Stanton MA DipEd(Sydney) V G Taylor BEc(Monash) B A Twohill BA Sarah S Waterman AB(Brown) MA(Hist amp Beons) (California)

Senior Tutors C J Bowers MCom D K MacDonald BA MCom

6

Departmental Office Staff Aileen M Rowley Elizabeth Williams Sheila Savage J A G~ Tobin

LEGAL STUDIES Professor K E Lindgren BA(New South Wales) LLB(London) MA PhD

Lecturers G Cowper-Hill LLB(Bristol) C S Enright LLB(Sydney) BA D W Mitchell BA LLB(Australian National University) T Presbury LLB(Sydney) BCom DipBusStud R N Watterson LLM(Sydney)

Senior Tutor W A G Enright BA(Sydney) LLB(London)

Departmental Office Staff Diane Wratten

7

Information for New Undergraduates

Students entering University for the first time may experience some difficulty in adapting to the study techniques required for success It is therefore important for the students to become familiar with the methods of organisation used within the University degree courses available and the University Counselling Service which offers assistshyance with study and personal problems The following reference books will be useful -

1 University Calendar This contains all the formal information about the By-Laws and Regulations governing courses and genershyal organisation

2 Faculty Handbooks These are issued by each Faculty and proshyvide information about the degree and special requirements

3 General Supplement to the Faculty Handbooks which contains details of administrative requirements and amenities and services

Students should note that it is possible to include some major streams of study in more than one degree course eg Commerce Economics Mathematics Psychology It is therefore important that care is taken to ensure a degree course is selected which will allow the inclusion of the full range of studies they wish to undertake

In 1977 the Faculty of Economics and Commerce will offer Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Economics degree courses Both degree courses offer a student the opportunity to select subjects from various disciplines offered within the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and in other faculties of the University provided certain constraints and prerequisite conditions stipulated in the degree reshyquirements are complied with Advice regarding the structure of both degrees will be given to all incoming students before enrolment at lectures given on enrolment days

Many students do not finally decide their chosen field of interest until after the first year of study However the initial seleotion of subjects should be made in light of the probable direction of their later interests and studies eltg students who have an interest in accounting or industrial relations should include Legal Studies I early in their programme

Students should study carefully the requirements for the degrees particularly with regard to compulsory subjects limitation of subjects chosen from each group and prerequisite requirements including the advisory prerequisites set out in the section Advice to Enrolling Stushydents It will be necessary for students who have not completed advisory prerequisites or equivalent study to undertake intensive preliminary reading

Limits are also set on the number of subjects students are permitted to take in anyone year These limits restrict a full-time student to

8

a maximum of four subjeots and part-time students to a maximum of two subjects in anyone year of study (Refer conditions set out in Schedule A of the Degree Requirements)

Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subshyjects in the course should seek help from members of the Faculty For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students consult the University Counselling Service (see relevant section in General Supplement)

Enquiries regarding enrolment variation to programme and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary Mr F C Hawkins Administration Building Room G72

Professioaal Recognition

The Australian Society of Accountants will exempt from the qualifyshying examination of the Society graduates of the University of Newshycastle who hold the Bachelor of Commerce degree and who have included certain specified subjects in their degree programme The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and the Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators also grant exemption from certain examinations for passes in particular subjects in the degree course or in the Diploma in Business Studies

Registration as a registered public accountant under the Public Acshycountants Registration Act 1945 (NSW) is also available to graduates who have included specified subjects in their Bachelor of Commerce degree programme

A pass in the subject of Taxation is accepted as a prerequisite for registration as a tax agent by the Tax Agents Board (NSW)

Examination requirements for advancement to Senior Associate status in the Australian Society of Accountants may be satisfied by including certain subjects in the Diploma in Business Studies the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree or the Master of Commerce

Particulars of these various exemptions are set out on notice boards in the Department of Commerce

Further enquiries and eventual applications for exemption should be directed to the professional associations concerned

Advisory Prereqnisite for Entry to the Faculty

In addition to satisfying the matriculation requirements of the Unishyversity candidates applying for entry to the FacuIty of Economics and Commerce are advised that a pass in 2 unit Mathematics at the

9

New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination or an examination at an equivalent standard in Mathematics is advisable

Candidates should note that there is no other advisory prerequisite for entry to the Faculty of Economics and Commerce It is not necessary for candidates applying for entry to have previously studied either Economics Accounting or Legal Studies

Student Participation in University Mairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as representatives to departmental meetings in the Departments of Economics Comshymerce and Legal Studies to the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce as well as to other university bodies Elections of representatives usually take place early in the first term and students should watch Department notice boards for details of Student Representative Elections

Student Academic Progress

All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory proshygress and in particular attention is drawn to By-laws 541 and 542 (refer to the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook) The following points on Faculty Board policy should also be borne in mind

1 The Faculty Board in terms of By-law 5412 requires that students shall pass at least one subject in their first year of fullshytime attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance

Students who fail to meet this requirement shall be referred to the Admissions Committee with a recommendation that they be excluded from the faculty or from the University

2 For the purposes of By-law 5422 the Faculty Board has determined that at least four subjects be passed at the end of the first two years of full-time attendance or at least five subjects be passed at the end of the first four years of part-time attendance

3 Faculty Board has further decided in terms of By-law 5412 that if in any year following the completion of two years fullshytime attendance or four years part-time attendance a students academic record since enrolment includes more failures than passes then the progress of that student shall be reviewed by the Faculty Board which may determine that such a student shall

(a) be permitted to re-enrol only in such subject or subjects as the Faculty Board shall specify

OR

10

(b) be referred to the Admissions Committee with a reComshymendation for exclusion from the Faculty or from the Unishyversity

For the purposes of this section a failure in a repeated subject shall count as a second failure

Any Iltudent who has been recommended to the Admissions Comshymittee for exclusion will have an opportunity to present a case why he should not be excluded

Student Problems

Members of the Faculty are willing to offer advice and assistance to students who have academic problems Where a problem clearly lies within the area of responsibility of some particular member of the teaching staff it is preferable that the matter be discussed initially with that member

A student may also find it helpful to discuss his problem with a student member of Faculty Board particularly if the student is reluctant to make a personal approach to a member of staff or is uncertain of the proper procedures to be followed

Assessment of Examination Results

In normal circumstances no contact may be made by or on behalf of a student with a member of the academic staff on the subject of a students examination script(s) between the date of the examinshyation in question and the official publication of results

Review of Examination Results

Examination results may be reviewed for a charge of $800 per subject which is refundable in the event of an error being discovershyed Students are advised that inter alia marginal failures are autoshymatically reviewed before publication of results Applications for review must be submitted on the appropriate form together with the prescribed review charge by the date notified in the publication of results

Institute of Industrial Economics

The Institute of Industrial Economics was established in April 1976 and is the first research institute within the University

It conducts research into the economic problems of Australian manushyfacturing industry the distributing and service trades and the mineral industry The Institute also acts as a centre for postgraduate train-

11

ing and research in the field of industrial economics where it colshylaborates closely with the Department of Economics Seminars and conferences are arranged from time to time and publications issued which report the results of the Institutes research programme

The University staff members who work for the Institute are mainly drawn from the Departments of Economics Commerce and Legal Studies However staff members from other departments of the University can be called upon to assist in particular projects

Many of the staff working for the Institute have previously acted as advisors or consultants of industry commerce and government The Institute also employs full-time research fellows and research assisshytants to meet the requirements of its research and consulting activities

The Board which administers the Institute consists of members from industry commerce and the University The Chairman of the Board is Sir Bede Callaghan CBE HonDSc FBIA F AIM The Director of the Institute is Professor B L Johns of the Department of Economics

Newcasde University Society of

Economics and Commerce Students

This is the Society designed to cater especially for the interests of students studying Economics Membership is open to all students and staff Each year an extensive programme of discussions lectures by prominent visitors and social events is organised

The managing committee of the Society is made up of representatives elected from each group (including first year) Enquiries concerning membership should be directed to the representatives of each group early in first term

Legal Studies Club

This club is designed to promote the study of and interest in law and it caters especially for the interests of students enrolled in courses offered by the Department of Legal Studies In previous years a programme of moots social events and leotures by prominent visitors was organised

The Club did not function in 1976 and it is suggested that students interested in reforming the Club meet early in the first term to elect officers and formulate a programme for the year

12

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF COMMERCE

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Commerce may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 Sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Accounting IV Economics IV and Legal Studies IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year the eighth Monday in first term

(li) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subje~t passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved tertiary institutions

13

work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 he minimum time f~r a course qualifying for an ordinary degree IS three years except tn those cases where candidates are granted standing

9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in (i) Economics

Oi) Accounting (iii) Legal Studies

(c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I Class II and Class IlL Class II shall have two divisions namely - Division I and Division II

10 (a)

(b)

II (a)

(b)

Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme Prior to entering Accounting IV Economics -IV or Legal Studies IV candidates for honours must pass all the prescribed subjects at a standard prescribed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head ofthe Department concerned

To qualify for the degree a candidate shall pass the subjects selected in conformity with the conditions set out in Schedule A to these Requirements The qualifying subjects for the degree shall be those listed in Schedule B to these Requirements

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may complete the Requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree in conjunction with another approved degree

2 Details of combined degree courses approved by the Faculty Board are set out on pages 26 et seq

14

by completing a combined course approved by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the other appropriate Faculty Board provided that

(i) Admission to a combined course shall normally be at the end of the first year and shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two Faculties concerned

(ii) Admission to combined courses will be restricted to students with an average of at least Credit level

(iii) The Deans of both Faculties after consultation with the Head(s) of Department(s) concerned shall certify that the work in the combined degree is no less in quantity and quality than if the two degrees were taken separately

(iv) An approved combined course shall satisfy the requirements of both degrees

13 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any requirement

Advice to Enrolling Students

Before enrolling in any subject leading to the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree all students should carefully note the following

I A student who has enrolled under degree requirements prior to 1973 may not enrol in any subject without first consulting the Faculty Secretary

2 The Dean in the application of conditions 5 and 6 of Schedule A may approve enrolment of a student in good standing in one additional subject in anyone year in the cases of (a) A student seeking to enrol in the final year of the course

who will graduate if he passes five subjects in the case of a full-time student or three subjects in the case of a part-time student

(b) A part-time student (other than one to whom the preceding paragraph (a) applies) seeking to enrol in a third or later year who has passed four subjects in the first two years of enrolment as a part-time student and who has not subseqentIy failed a subject

3 In addition to the compulsory prerequisites listed on p 20 students should note that (a) Economics I is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Introductory

Quantitative Methods (b) Economics II is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Money

and Banking (c) Legal Studies I is an advisory prerequisite for Industrial Law

15

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I

Senior Tutors P J Best BCom(Queensland) Ellen M Braye BCom BA G R Dowling BCom DipBusStud AASA(Senior) M J Tippett BCom

Tutor Demonstrator R J Craig BCom AASA(Senior)

Part-time Tutors L A Brien BCom ACA L J Caldwell BCom AASA(Senior) ACIS D R Forsythe BCom K M Graham BCom AASA ACIS H Lunney AASA ACIS H S McKensey BCom FCA G Mitchell MCom AASA ACIS M J Zugai BCom

Departmental Office Staff L R Bartlett Judith L Campbell Maxine J Zerafa

Professors B L Johns MA(Cambridge)

ECONOMICS

C A Tisdell BCom(New South Wales) PhD(Australian National) (Head of Department)

Associate Professor B L J Gordon MBe(Sydney) PhD

Senior Lecturers C J Aislabie MBe(Sydney) Php(London) N J Dickinson BCom(New South Wales) PhD S N Jacobi AB(Princeton) MA(South Carolina) R W McShane BA(New England) MA(Alberta) W J Sheehan BBe(Sydney) MA P W Sherwood BCom(London)

Lecturers Paula R Anderson BA MCom DipEd(New South Wales) J C de Castro Lopo MA(Wisconsin) H W Dick BBe(Monash) MBe(Australian National) J A Doeleman Drs(Nederlandse Beonomische Hogeschool Rotterdam) W C Dunlop BA(Aucklantl) MCom J R Fisher BA PhD(Hull) P C Ip BS (Illinois) PhD (Western Ontario) G R Keating MEc(New England) R R Piggott MAgEc(New England) PhD (Cornell) C W Stahl BA(California State College) PhD(California) P J C Stanton MA DipEd(Sydney) V G Taylor BEc(Monash) B A Twohill BA Sarah S Waterman AB(Brown) MA(Hist amp Beons) (California)

Senior Tutors C J Bowers MCom D K MacDonald BA MCom

6

Departmental Office Staff Aileen M Rowley Elizabeth Williams Sheila Savage J A G~ Tobin

LEGAL STUDIES Professor K E Lindgren BA(New South Wales) LLB(London) MA PhD

Lecturers G Cowper-Hill LLB(Bristol) C S Enright LLB(Sydney) BA D W Mitchell BA LLB(Australian National University) T Presbury LLB(Sydney) BCom DipBusStud R N Watterson LLM(Sydney)

Senior Tutor W A G Enright BA(Sydney) LLB(London)

Departmental Office Staff Diane Wratten

7

Information for New Undergraduates

Students entering University for the first time may experience some difficulty in adapting to the study techniques required for success It is therefore important for the students to become familiar with the methods of organisation used within the University degree courses available and the University Counselling Service which offers assistshyance with study and personal problems The following reference books will be useful -

1 University Calendar This contains all the formal information about the By-Laws and Regulations governing courses and genershyal organisation

2 Faculty Handbooks These are issued by each Faculty and proshyvide information about the degree and special requirements

3 General Supplement to the Faculty Handbooks which contains details of administrative requirements and amenities and services

Students should note that it is possible to include some major streams of study in more than one degree course eg Commerce Economics Mathematics Psychology It is therefore important that care is taken to ensure a degree course is selected which will allow the inclusion of the full range of studies they wish to undertake

In 1977 the Faculty of Economics and Commerce will offer Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Economics degree courses Both degree courses offer a student the opportunity to select subjects from various disciplines offered within the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and in other faculties of the University provided certain constraints and prerequisite conditions stipulated in the degree reshyquirements are complied with Advice regarding the structure of both degrees will be given to all incoming students before enrolment at lectures given on enrolment days

Many students do not finally decide their chosen field of interest until after the first year of study However the initial seleotion of subjects should be made in light of the probable direction of their later interests and studies eltg students who have an interest in accounting or industrial relations should include Legal Studies I early in their programme

Students should study carefully the requirements for the degrees particularly with regard to compulsory subjects limitation of subjects chosen from each group and prerequisite requirements including the advisory prerequisites set out in the section Advice to Enrolling Stushydents It will be necessary for students who have not completed advisory prerequisites or equivalent study to undertake intensive preliminary reading

Limits are also set on the number of subjects students are permitted to take in anyone year These limits restrict a full-time student to

8

a maximum of four subjeots and part-time students to a maximum of two subjects in anyone year of study (Refer conditions set out in Schedule A of the Degree Requirements)

Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subshyjects in the course should seek help from members of the Faculty For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students consult the University Counselling Service (see relevant section in General Supplement)

Enquiries regarding enrolment variation to programme and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary Mr F C Hawkins Administration Building Room G72

Professioaal Recognition

The Australian Society of Accountants will exempt from the qualifyshying examination of the Society graduates of the University of Newshycastle who hold the Bachelor of Commerce degree and who have included certain specified subjects in their degree programme The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and the Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators also grant exemption from certain examinations for passes in particular subjects in the degree course or in the Diploma in Business Studies

Registration as a registered public accountant under the Public Acshycountants Registration Act 1945 (NSW) is also available to graduates who have included specified subjects in their Bachelor of Commerce degree programme

A pass in the subject of Taxation is accepted as a prerequisite for registration as a tax agent by the Tax Agents Board (NSW)

Examination requirements for advancement to Senior Associate status in the Australian Society of Accountants may be satisfied by including certain subjects in the Diploma in Business Studies the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree or the Master of Commerce

Particulars of these various exemptions are set out on notice boards in the Department of Commerce

Further enquiries and eventual applications for exemption should be directed to the professional associations concerned

Advisory Prereqnisite for Entry to the Faculty

In addition to satisfying the matriculation requirements of the Unishyversity candidates applying for entry to the FacuIty of Economics and Commerce are advised that a pass in 2 unit Mathematics at the

9

New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination or an examination at an equivalent standard in Mathematics is advisable

Candidates should note that there is no other advisory prerequisite for entry to the Faculty of Economics and Commerce It is not necessary for candidates applying for entry to have previously studied either Economics Accounting or Legal Studies

Student Participation in University Mairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as representatives to departmental meetings in the Departments of Economics Comshymerce and Legal Studies to the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce as well as to other university bodies Elections of representatives usually take place early in the first term and students should watch Department notice boards for details of Student Representative Elections

Student Academic Progress

All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory proshygress and in particular attention is drawn to By-laws 541 and 542 (refer to the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook) The following points on Faculty Board policy should also be borne in mind

1 The Faculty Board in terms of By-law 5412 requires that students shall pass at least one subject in their first year of fullshytime attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance

Students who fail to meet this requirement shall be referred to the Admissions Committee with a recommendation that they be excluded from the faculty or from the University

2 For the purposes of By-law 5422 the Faculty Board has determined that at least four subjects be passed at the end of the first two years of full-time attendance or at least five subjects be passed at the end of the first four years of part-time attendance

3 Faculty Board has further decided in terms of By-law 5412 that if in any year following the completion of two years fullshytime attendance or four years part-time attendance a students academic record since enrolment includes more failures than passes then the progress of that student shall be reviewed by the Faculty Board which may determine that such a student shall

(a) be permitted to re-enrol only in such subject or subjects as the Faculty Board shall specify

OR

10

(b) be referred to the Admissions Committee with a reComshymendation for exclusion from the Faculty or from the Unishyversity

For the purposes of this section a failure in a repeated subject shall count as a second failure

Any Iltudent who has been recommended to the Admissions Comshymittee for exclusion will have an opportunity to present a case why he should not be excluded

Student Problems

Members of the Faculty are willing to offer advice and assistance to students who have academic problems Where a problem clearly lies within the area of responsibility of some particular member of the teaching staff it is preferable that the matter be discussed initially with that member

A student may also find it helpful to discuss his problem with a student member of Faculty Board particularly if the student is reluctant to make a personal approach to a member of staff or is uncertain of the proper procedures to be followed

Assessment of Examination Results

In normal circumstances no contact may be made by or on behalf of a student with a member of the academic staff on the subject of a students examination script(s) between the date of the examinshyation in question and the official publication of results

Review of Examination Results

Examination results may be reviewed for a charge of $800 per subject which is refundable in the event of an error being discovershyed Students are advised that inter alia marginal failures are autoshymatically reviewed before publication of results Applications for review must be submitted on the appropriate form together with the prescribed review charge by the date notified in the publication of results

Institute of Industrial Economics

The Institute of Industrial Economics was established in April 1976 and is the first research institute within the University

It conducts research into the economic problems of Australian manushyfacturing industry the distributing and service trades and the mineral industry The Institute also acts as a centre for postgraduate train-

11

ing and research in the field of industrial economics where it colshylaborates closely with the Department of Economics Seminars and conferences are arranged from time to time and publications issued which report the results of the Institutes research programme

The University staff members who work for the Institute are mainly drawn from the Departments of Economics Commerce and Legal Studies However staff members from other departments of the University can be called upon to assist in particular projects

Many of the staff working for the Institute have previously acted as advisors or consultants of industry commerce and government The Institute also employs full-time research fellows and research assisshytants to meet the requirements of its research and consulting activities

The Board which administers the Institute consists of members from industry commerce and the University The Chairman of the Board is Sir Bede Callaghan CBE HonDSc FBIA F AIM The Director of the Institute is Professor B L Johns of the Department of Economics

Newcasde University Society of

Economics and Commerce Students

This is the Society designed to cater especially for the interests of students studying Economics Membership is open to all students and staff Each year an extensive programme of discussions lectures by prominent visitors and social events is organised

The managing committee of the Society is made up of representatives elected from each group (including first year) Enquiries concerning membership should be directed to the representatives of each group early in first term

Legal Studies Club

This club is designed to promote the study of and interest in law and it caters especially for the interests of students enrolled in courses offered by the Department of Legal Studies In previous years a programme of moots social events and leotures by prominent visitors was organised

The Club did not function in 1976 and it is suggested that students interested in reforming the Club meet early in the first term to elect officers and formulate a programme for the year

12

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF COMMERCE

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Commerce may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 Sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Accounting IV Economics IV and Legal Studies IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year the eighth Monday in first term

(li) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subje~t passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved tertiary institutions

13

work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 he minimum time f~r a course qualifying for an ordinary degree IS three years except tn those cases where candidates are granted standing

9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in (i) Economics

Oi) Accounting (iii) Legal Studies

(c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I Class II and Class IlL Class II shall have two divisions namely - Division I and Division II

10 (a)

(b)

II (a)

(b)

Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme Prior to entering Accounting IV Economics -IV or Legal Studies IV candidates for honours must pass all the prescribed subjects at a standard prescribed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head ofthe Department concerned

To qualify for the degree a candidate shall pass the subjects selected in conformity with the conditions set out in Schedule A to these Requirements The qualifying subjects for the degree shall be those listed in Schedule B to these Requirements

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may complete the Requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree in conjunction with another approved degree

2 Details of combined degree courses approved by the Faculty Board are set out on pages 26 et seq

14

by completing a combined course approved by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the other appropriate Faculty Board provided that

(i) Admission to a combined course shall normally be at the end of the first year and shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two Faculties concerned

(ii) Admission to combined courses will be restricted to students with an average of at least Credit level

(iii) The Deans of both Faculties after consultation with the Head(s) of Department(s) concerned shall certify that the work in the combined degree is no less in quantity and quality than if the two degrees were taken separately

(iv) An approved combined course shall satisfy the requirements of both degrees

13 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any requirement

Advice to Enrolling Students

Before enrolling in any subject leading to the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree all students should carefully note the following

I A student who has enrolled under degree requirements prior to 1973 may not enrol in any subject without first consulting the Faculty Secretary

2 The Dean in the application of conditions 5 and 6 of Schedule A may approve enrolment of a student in good standing in one additional subject in anyone year in the cases of (a) A student seeking to enrol in the final year of the course

who will graduate if he passes five subjects in the case of a full-time student or three subjects in the case of a part-time student

(b) A part-time student (other than one to whom the preceding paragraph (a) applies) seeking to enrol in a third or later year who has passed four subjects in the first two years of enrolment as a part-time student and who has not subseqentIy failed a subject

3 In addition to the compulsory prerequisites listed on p 20 students should note that (a) Economics I is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Introductory

Quantitative Methods (b) Economics II is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Money

and Banking (c) Legal Studies I is an advisory prerequisite for Industrial Law

15

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I

Information for New Undergraduates

Students entering University for the first time may experience some difficulty in adapting to the study techniques required for success It is therefore important for the students to become familiar with the methods of organisation used within the University degree courses available and the University Counselling Service which offers assistshyance with study and personal problems The following reference books will be useful -

1 University Calendar This contains all the formal information about the By-Laws and Regulations governing courses and genershyal organisation

2 Faculty Handbooks These are issued by each Faculty and proshyvide information about the degree and special requirements

3 General Supplement to the Faculty Handbooks which contains details of administrative requirements and amenities and services

Students should note that it is possible to include some major streams of study in more than one degree course eg Commerce Economics Mathematics Psychology It is therefore important that care is taken to ensure a degree course is selected which will allow the inclusion of the full range of studies they wish to undertake

In 1977 the Faculty of Economics and Commerce will offer Bachelor of Commerce and Bachelor of Economics degree courses Both degree courses offer a student the opportunity to select subjects from various disciplines offered within the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and in other faculties of the University provided certain constraints and prerequisite conditions stipulated in the degree reshyquirements are complied with Advice regarding the structure of both degrees will be given to all incoming students before enrolment at lectures given on enrolment days

Many students do not finally decide their chosen field of interest until after the first year of study However the initial seleotion of subjects should be made in light of the probable direction of their later interests and studies eltg students who have an interest in accounting or industrial relations should include Legal Studies I early in their programme

Students should study carefully the requirements for the degrees particularly with regard to compulsory subjects limitation of subjects chosen from each group and prerequisite requirements including the advisory prerequisites set out in the section Advice to Enrolling Stushydents It will be necessary for students who have not completed advisory prerequisites or equivalent study to undertake intensive preliminary reading

Limits are also set on the number of subjects students are permitted to take in anyone year These limits restrict a full-time student to

8

a maximum of four subjeots and part-time students to a maximum of two subjects in anyone year of study (Refer conditions set out in Schedule A of the Degree Requirements)

Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subshyjects in the course should seek help from members of the Faculty For personal counselling and study skills training it is suggested that students consult the University Counselling Service (see relevant section in General Supplement)

Enquiries regarding enrolment variation to programme and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary Mr F C Hawkins Administration Building Room G72

Professioaal Recognition

The Australian Society of Accountants will exempt from the qualifyshying examination of the Society graduates of the University of Newshycastle who hold the Bachelor of Commerce degree and who have included certain specified subjects in their degree programme The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and the Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators also grant exemption from certain examinations for passes in particular subjects in the degree course or in the Diploma in Business Studies

Registration as a registered public accountant under the Public Acshycountants Registration Act 1945 (NSW) is also available to graduates who have included specified subjects in their Bachelor of Commerce degree programme

A pass in the subject of Taxation is accepted as a prerequisite for registration as a tax agent by the Tax Agents Board (NSW)

Examination requirements for advancement to Senior Associate status in the Australian Society of Accountants may be satisfied by including certain subjects in the Diploma in Business Studies the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree or the Master of Commerce

Particulars of these various exemptions are set out on notice boards in the Department of Commerce

Further enquiries and eventual applications for exemption should be directed to the professional associations concerned

Advisory Prereqnisite for Entry to the Faculty

In addition to satisfying the matriculation requirements of the Unishyversity candidates applying for entry to the FacuIty of Economics and Commerce are advised that a pass in 2 unit Mathematics at the

9

New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination or an examination at an equivalent standard in Mathematics is advisable

Candidates should note that there is no other advisory prerequisite for entry to the Faculty of Economics and Commerce It is not necessary for candidates applying for entry to have previously studied either Economics Accounting or Legal Studies

Student Participation in University Mairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as representatives to departmental meetings in the Departments of Economics Comshymerce and Legal Studies to the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce as well as to other university bodies Elections of representatives usually take place early in the first term and students should watch Department notice boards for details of Student Representative Elections

Student Academic Progress

All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory proshygress and in particular attention is drawn to By-laws 541 and 542 (refer to the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook) The following points on Faculty Board policy should also be borne in mind

1 The Faculty Board in terms of By-law 5412 requires that students shall pass at least one subject in their first year of fullshytime attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance

Students who fail to meet this requirement shall be referred to the Admissions Committee with a recommendation that they be excluded from the faculty or from the University

2 For the purposes of By-law 5422 the Faculty Board has determined that at least four subjects be passed at the end of the first two years of full-time attendance or at least five subjects be passed at the end of the first four years of part-time attendance

3 Faculty Board has further decided in terms of By-law 5412 that if in any year following the completion of two years fullshytime attendance or four years part-time attendance a students academic record since enrolment includes more failures than passes then the progress of that student shall be reviewed by the Faculty Board which may determine that such a student shall

(a) be permitted to re-enrol only in such subject or subjects as the Faculty Board shall specify

OR

10

(b) be referred to the Admissions Committee with a reComshymendation for exclusion from the Faculty or from the Unishyversity

For the purposes of this section a failure in a repeated subject shall count as a second failure

Any Iltudent who has been recommended to the Admissions Comshymittee for exclusion will have an opportunity to present a case why he should not be excluded

Student Problems

Members of the Faculty are willing to offer advice and assistance to students who have academic problems Where a problem clearly lies within the area of responsibility of some particular member of the teaching staff it is preferable that the matter be discussed initially with that member

A student may also find it helpful to discuss his problem with a student member of Faculty Board particularly if the student is reluctant to make a personal approach to a member of staff or is uncertain of the proper procedures to be followed

Assessment of Examination Results

In normal circumstances no contact may be made by or on behalf of a student with a member of the academic staff on the subject of a students examination script(s) between the date of the examinshyation in question and the official publication of results

Review of Examination Results

Examination results may be reviewed for a charge of $800 per subject which is refundable in the event of an error being discovershyed Students are advised that inter alia marginal failures are autoshymatically reviewed before publication of results Applications for review must be submitted on the appropriate form together with the prescribed review charge by the date notified in the publication of results

Institute of Industrial Economics

The Institute of Industrial Economics was established in April 1976 and is the first research institute within the University

It conducts research into the economic problems of Australian manushyfacturing industry the distributing and service trades and the mineral industry The Institute also acts as a centre for postgraduate train-

11

ing and research in the field of industrial economics where it colshylaborates closely with the Department of Economics Seminars and conferences are arranged from time to time and publications issued which report the results of the Institutes research programme

The University staff members who work for the Institute are mainly drawn from the Departments of Economics Commerce and Legal Studies However staff members from other departments of the University can be called upon to assist in particular projects

Many of the staff working for the Institute have previously acted as advisors or consultants of industry commerce and government The Institute also employs full-time research fellows and research assisshytants to meet the requirements of its research and consulting activities

The Board which administers the Institute consists of members from industry commerce and the University The Chairman of the Board is Sir Bede Callaghan CBE HonDSc FBIA F AIM The Director of the Institute is Professor B L Johns of the Department of Economics

Newcasde University Society of

Economics and Commerce Students

This is the Society designed to cater especially for the interests of students studying Economics Membership is open to all students and staff Each year an extensive programme of discussions lectures by prominent visitors and social events is organised

The managing committee of the Society is made up of representatives elected from each group (including first year) Enquiries concerning membership should be directed to the representatives of each group early in first term

Legal Studies Club

This club is designed to promote the study of and interest in law and it caters especially for the interests of students enrolled in courses offered by the Department of Legal Studies In previous years a programme of moots social events and leotures by prominent visitors was organised

The Club did not function in 1976 and it is suggested that students interested in reforming the Club meet early in the first term to elect officers and formulate a programme for the year

12

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF COMMERCE

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Commerce may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 Sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Accounting IV Economics IV and Legal Studies IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year the eighth Monday in first term

(li) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subje~t passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved tertiary institutions

13

work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 he minimum time f~r a course qualifying for an ordinary degree IS three years except tn those cases where candidates are granted standing

9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in (i) Economics

Oi) Accounting (iii) Legal Studies

(c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I Class II and Class IlL Class II shall have two divisions namely - Division I and Division II

10 (a)

(b)

II (a)

(b)

Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme Prior to entering Accounting IV Economics -IV or Legal Studies IV candidates for honours must pass all the prescribed subjects at a standard prescribed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head ofthe Department concerned

To qualify for the degree a candidate shall pass the subjects selected in conformity with the conditions set out in Schedule A to these Requirements The qualifying subjects for the degree shall be those listed in Schedule B to these Requirements

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may complete the Requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree in conjunction with another approved degree

2 Details of combined degree courses approved by the Faculty Board are set out on pages 26 et seq

14

by completing a combined course approved by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the other appropriate Faculty Board provided that

(i) Admission to a combined course shall normally be at the end of the first year and shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two Faculties concerned

(ii) Admission to combined courses will be restricted to students with an average of at least Credit level

(iii) The Deans of both Faculties after consultation with the Head(s) of Department(s) concerned shall certify that the work in the combined degree is no less in quantity and quality than if the two degrees were taken separately

(iv) An approved combined course shall satisfy the requirements of both degrees

13 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any requirement

Advice to Enrolling Students

Before enrolling in any subject leading to the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree all students should carefully note the following

I A student who has enrolled under degree requirements prior to 1973 may not enrol in any subject without first consulting the Faculty Secretary

2 The Dean in the application of conditions 5 and 6 of Schedule A may approve enrolment of a student in good standing in one additional subject in anyone year in the cases of (a) A student seeking to enrol in the final year of the course

who will graduate if he passes five subjects in the case of a full-time student or three subjects in the case of a part-time student

(b) A part-time student (other than one to whom the preceding paragraph (a) applies) seeking to enrol in a third or later year who has passed four subjects in the first two years of enrolment as a part-time student and who has not subseqentIy failed a subject

3 In addition to the compulsory prerequisites listed on p 20 students should note that (a) Economics I is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Introductory

Quantitative Methods (b) Economics II is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Money

and Banking (c) Legal Studies I is an advisory prerequisite for Industrial Law

15

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I

New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination or an examination at an equivalent standard in Mathematics is advisable

Candidates should note that there is no other advisory prerequisite for entry to the Faculty of Economics and Commerce It is not necessary for candidates applying for entry to have previously studied either Economics Accounting or Legal Studies

Student Participation in University Mairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as representatives to departmental meetings in the Departments of Economics Comshymerce and Legal Studies to the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce as well as to other university bodies Elections of representatives usually take place early in the first term and students should watch Department notice boards for details of Student Representative Elections

Student Academic Progress

All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory proshygress and in particular attention is drawn to By-laws 541 and 542 (refer to the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook) The following points on Faculty Board policy should also be borne in mind

1 The Faculty Board in terms of By-law 5412 requires that students shall pass at least one subject in their first year of fullshytime attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance

Students who fail to meet this requirement shall be referred to the Admissions Committee with a recommendation that they be excluded from the faculty or from the University

2 For the purposes of By-law 5422 the Faculty Board has determined that at least four subjects be passed at the end of the first two years of full-time attendance or at least five subjects be passed at the end of the first four years of part-time attendance

3 Faculty Board has further decided in terms of By-law 5412 that if in any year following the completion of two years fullshytime attendance or four years part-time attendance a students academic record since enrolment includes more failures than passes then the progress of that student shall be reviewed by the Faculty Board which may determine that such a student shall

(a) be permitted to re-enrol only in such subject or subjects as the Faculty Board shall specify

OR

10

(b) be referred to the Admissions Committee with a reComshymendation for exclusion from the Faculty or from the Unishyversity

For the purposes of this section a failure in a repeated subject shall count as a second failure

Any Iltudent who has been recommended to the Admissions Comshymittee for exclusion will have an opportunity to present a case why he should not be excluded

Student Problems

Members of the Faculty are willing to offer advice and assistance to students who have academic problems Where a problem clearly lies within the area of responsibility of some particular member of the teaching staff it is preferable that the matter be discussed initially with that member

A student may also find it helpful to discuss his problem with a student member of Faculty Board particularly if the student is reluctant to make a personal approach to a member of staff or is uncertain of the proper procedures to be followed

Assessment of Examination Results

In normal circumstances no contact may be made by or on behalf of a student with a member of the academic staff on the subject of a students examination script(s) between the date of the examinshyation in question and the official publication of results

Review of Examination Results

Examination results may be reviewed for a charge of $800 per subject which is refundable in the event of an error being discovershyed Students are advised that inter alia marginal failures are autoshymatically reviewed before publication of results Applications for review must be submitted on the appropriate form together with the prescribed review charge by the date notified in the publication of results

Institute of Industrial Economics

The Institute of Industrial Economics was established in April 1976 and is the first research institute within the University

It conducts research into the economic problems of Australian manushyfacturing industry the distributing and service trades and the mineral industry The Institute also acts as a centre for postgraduate train-

11

ing and research in the field of industrial economics where it colshylaborates closely with the Department of Economics Seminars and conferences are arranged from time to time and publications issued which report the results of the Institutes research programme

The University staff members who work for the Institute are mainly drawn from the Departments of Economics Commerce and Legal Studies However staff members from other departments of the University can be called upon to assist in particular projects

Many of the staff working for the Institute have previously acted as advisors or consultants of industry commerce and government The Institute also employs full-time research fellows and research assisshytants to meet the requirements of its research and consulting activities

The Board which administers the Institute consists of members from industry commerce and the University The Chairman of the Board is Sir Bede Callaghan CBE HonDSc FBIA F AIM The Director of the Institute is Professor B L Johns of the Department of Economics

Newcasde University Society of

Economics and Commerce Students

This is the Society designed to cater especially for the interests of students studying Economics Membership is open to all students and staff Each year an extensive programme of discussions lectures by prominent visitors and social events is organised

The managing committee of the Society is made up of representatives elected from each group (including first year) Enquiries concerning membership should be directed to the representatives of each group early in first term

Legal Studies Club

This club is designed to promote the study of and interest in law and it caters especially for the interests of students enrolled in courses offered by the Department of Legal Studies In previous years a programme of moots social events and leotures by prominent visitors was organised

The Club did not function in 1976 and it is suggested that students interested in reforming the Club meet early in the first term to elect officers and formulate a programme for the year

12

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF COMMERCE

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Commerce may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 Sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Accounting IV Economics IV and Legal Studies IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year the eighth Monday in first term

(li) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subje~t passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved tertiary institutions

13

work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 he minimum time f~r a course qualifying for an ordinary degree IS three years except tn those cases where candidates are granted standing

9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in (i) Economics

Oi) Accounting (iii) Legal Studies

(c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I Class II and Class IlL Class II shall have two divisions namely - Division I and Division II

10 (a)

(b)

II (a)

(b)

Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme Prior to entering Accounting IV Economics -IV or Legal Studies IV candidates for honours must pass all the prescribed subjects at a standard prescribed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head ofthe Department concerned

To qualify for the degree a candidate shall pass the subjects selected in conformity with the conditions set out in Schedule A to these Requirements The qualifying subjects for the degree shall be those listed in Schedule B to these Requirements

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may complete the Requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree in conjunction with another approved degree

2 Details of combined degree courses approved by the Faculty Board are set out on pages 26 et seq

14

by completing a combined course approved by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the other appropriate Faculty Board provided that

(i) Admission to a combined course shall normally be at the end of the first year and shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two Faculties concerned

(ii) Admission to combined courses will be restricted to students with an average of at least Credit level

(iii) The Deans of both Faculties after consultation with the Head(s) of Department(s) concerned shall certify that the work in the combined degree is no less in quantity and quality than if the two degrees were taken separately

(iv) An approved combined course shall satisfy the requirements of both degrees

13 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any requirement

Advice to Enrolling Students

Before enrolling in any subject leading to the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree all students should carefully note the following

I A student who has enrolled under degree requirements prior to 1973 may not enrol in any subject without first consulting the Faculty Secretary

2 The Dean in the application of conditions 5 and 6 of Schedule A may approve enrolment of a student in good standing in one additional subject in anyone year in the cases of (a) A student seeking to enrol in the final year of the course

who will graduate if he passes five subjects in the case of a full-time student or three subjects in the case of a part-time student

(b) A part-time student (other than one to whom the preceding paragraph (a) applies) seeking to enrol in a third or later year who has passed four subjects in the first two years of enrolment as a part-time student and who has not subseqentIy failed a subject

3 In addition to the compulsory prerequisites listed on p 20 students should note that (a) Economics I is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Introductory

Quantitative Methods (b) Economics II is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Money

and Banking (c) Legal Studies I is an advisory prerequisite for Industrial Law

15

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I

ing and research in the field of industrial economics where it colshylaborates closely with the Department of Economics Seminars and conferences are arranged from time to time and publications issued which report the results of the Institutes research programme

The University staff members who work for the Institute are mainly drawn from the Departments of Economics Commerce and Legal Studies However staff members from other departments of the University can be called upon to assist in particular projects

Many of the staff working for the Institute have previously acted as advisors or consultants of industry commerce and government The Institute also employs full-time research fellows and research assisshytants to meet the requirements of its research and consulting activities

The Board which administers the Institute consists of members from industry commerce and the University The Chairman of the Board is Sir Bede Callaghan CBE HonDSc FBIA F AIM The Director of the Institute is Professor B L Johns of the Department of Economics

Newcasde University Society of

Economics and Commerce Students

This is the Society designed to cater especially for the interests of students studying Economics Membership is open to all students and staff Each year an extensive programme of discussions lectures by prominent visitors and social events is organised

The managing committee of the Society is made up of representatives elected from each group (including first year) Enquiries concerning membership should be directed to the representatives of each group early in first term

Legal Studies Club

This club is designed to promote the study of and interest in law and it caters especially for the interests of students enrolled in courses offered by the Department of Legal Studies In previous years a programme of moots social events and leotures by prominent visitors was organised

The Club did not function in 1976 and it is suggested that students interested in reforming the Club meet early in the first term to elect officers and formulate a programme for the year

12

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF COMMERCE

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Commerce may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 Sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Accounting IV Economics IV and Legal Studies IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year the eighth Monday in first term

(li) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subje~t passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved tertiary institutions

13

work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 he minimum time f~r a course qualifying for an ordinary degree IS three years except tn those cases where candidates are granted standing

9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in (i) Economics

Oi) Accounting (iii) Legal Studies

(c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I Class II and Class IlL Class II shall have two divisions namely - Division I and Division II

10 (a)

(b)

II (a)

(b)

Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme Prior to entering Accounting IV Economics -IV or Legal Studies IV candidates for honours must pass all the prescribed subjects at a standard prescribed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head ofthe Department concerned

To qualify for the degree a candidate shall pass the subjects selected in conformity with the conditions set out in Schedule A to these Requirements The qualifying subjects for the degree shall be those listed in Schedule B to these Requirements

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may complete the Requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree in conjunction with another approved degree

2 Details of combined degree courses approved by the Faculty Board are set out on pages 26 et seq

14

by completing a combined course approved by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the other appropriate Faculty Board provided that

(i) Admission to a combined course shall normally be at the end of the first year and shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two Faculties concerned

(ii) Admission to combined courses will be restricted to students with an average of at least Credit level

(iii) The Deans of both Faculties after consultation with the Head(s) of Department(s) concerned shall certify that the work in the combined degree is no less in quantity and quality than if the two degrees were taken separately

(iv) An approved combined course shall satisfy the requirements of both degrees

13 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any requirement

Advice to Enrolling Students

Before enrolling in any subject leading to the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree all students should carefully note the following

I A student who has enrolled under degree requirements prior to 1973 may not enrol in any subject without first consulting the Faculty Secretary

2 The Dean in the application of conditions 5 and 6 of Schedule A may approve enrolment of a student in good standing in one additional subject in anyone year in the cases of (a) A student seeking to enrol in the final year of the course

who will graduate if he passes five subjects in the case of a full-time student or three subjects in the case of a part-time student

(b) A part-time student (other than one to whom the preceding paragraph (a) applies) seeking to enrol in a third or later year who has passed four subjects in the first two years of enrolment as a part-time student and who has not subseqentIy failed a subject

3 In addition to the compulsory prerequisites listed on p 20 students should note that (a) Economics I is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Introductory

Quantitative Methods (b) Economics II is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Money

and Banking (c) Legal Studies I is an advisory prerequisite for Industrial Law

15

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I

work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 he minimum time f~r a course qualifying for an ordinary degree IS three years except tn those cases where candidates are granted standing

9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in (i) Economics

Oi) Accounting (iii) Legal Studies

(c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I Class II and Class IlL Class II shall have two divisions namely - Division I and Division II

10 (a)

(b)

II (a)

(b)

Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme Prior to entering Accounting IV Economics -IV or Legal Studies IV candidates for honours must pass all the prescribed subjects at a standard prescribed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head ofthe Department concerned

To qualify for the degree a candidate shall pass the subjects selected in conformity with the conditions set out in Schedule A to these Requirements The qualifying subjects for the degree shall be those listed in Schedule B to these Requirements

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may complete the Requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree in conjunction with another approved degree

2 Details of combined degree courses approved by the Faculty Board are set out on pages 26 et seq

14

by completing a combined course approved by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the other appropriate Faculty Board provided that

(i) Admission to a combined course shall normally be at the end of the first year and shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two Faculties concerned

(ii) Admission to combined courses will be restricted to students with an average of at least Credit level

(iii) The Deans of both Faculties after consultation with the Head(s) of Department(s) concerned shall certify that the work in the combined degree is no less in quantity and quality than if the two degrees were taken separately

(iv) An approved combined course shall satisfy the requirements of both degrees

13 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any requirement

Advice to Enrolling Students

Before enrolling in any subject leading to the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree all students should carefully note the following

I A student who has enrolled under degree requirements prior to 1973 may not enrol in any subject without first consulting the Faculty Secretary

2 The Dean in the application of conditions 5 and 6 of Schedule A may approve enrolment of a student in good standing in one additional subject in anyone year in the cases of (a) A student seeking to enrol in the final year of the course

who will graduate if he passes five subjects in the case of a full-time student or three subjects in the case of a part-time student

(b) A part-time student (other than one to whom the preceding paragraph (a) applies) seeking to enrol in a third or later year who has passed four subjects in the first two years of enrolment as a part-time student and who has not subseqentIy failed a subject

3 In addition to the compulsory prerequisites listed on p 20 students should note that (a) Economics I is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Introductory

Quantitative Methods (b) Economics II is an advisory pre- or corequisite for Money

and Banking (c) Legal Studies I is an advisory prerequisite for Industrial Law

15

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I

(d) Law of Contract is an advisory prerequIsite for Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

(e) Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations II

(f)1 Industrial Law and Theories of Organisation are advisory pre- or corequisites for Industrial Relations III

(g) Introductory Quantitative Methods is an advisory prerequisite for Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB

4 A student wishing to proceed to Econometrics I is advised to enrol in Statistical Analysis

5 The Department of Legal Studies offers a number of half subjects each taught over one half academic year These half subjects introduce a degree of flexibility to the degree course by permitting students to compose their own Group B and Group C legal subjects Students should check the timetable prior to enrolling to ascertain the half subjects being offered and the date lectures will commence It will not be possible to offer all the half subjects listed in Schedule B each year however the Department has indicated that it intends to offer the following programme in 1977 and 1978

First Half of Academic Year 19772

Law of Business Organisations Trade Practices Law

1978

Second Half of Academic Year

Special Contracts Bankruptcy Executors amp Trustees

Administrative Law Consumer Protection Law

Law of Contract Special Contracts Law of Business Organisations Executors amp Trustees Bankruptcy The Corporation amp Australian Administrative Law

Law Society Business amp Consumer Credit Law

1 Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 2 Law of Contract will not be offered in 1977 but will be available each year

thereafter

SCHEDULE A

CONDITIONS GOVERNING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS THE ORDINARY DEGREE-To qualify for the award of a Bachelor of Commerce degree a candidate shall pass not fewer than 12 subjects selected in accordance with the following conditions

1 Accounting I Economics I and Introd uctory Quantitative Methods are compulsory

1 Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

16

2 Not more than five subjects may be selected from the Group A subjects

3 Not fewer than three subjects shall be selected from the Group C sUbjects

4 Except with the approval of the Dean a student may not enrol in a Group C subject until he has passed the three compulsory Group A subjects viz Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods

5 Except with the approval of the Dean a full-time student may not enrol in more than four subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

6 Except with the approval of the Dean a part-time student may not enrol in more than two subjects in anyone year of the ordinary degree course

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ACCOUNTING

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Accounting IV3 (b) select both Accounting IIA and Accounting lIB (c) pass Accounting Seminar I and Accounting Seminar II (d) select either Accounting IlIA or Accounting IIIB he may not

select both (e) pass Accounting IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - ECONOMICS

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Economics IV (b) pass Economics I Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics

II and at least four of -Economic History I Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II OR Statistical Analysis Comparative Economic Systems Industry Economics Labour Economics Money amp Banking Econometrics I

3 A candidate for honours in Accounting may be permitted to undertake Preliminary Studies for Accounting IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

17

Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought International Economics

Labour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Theory of Economic Policy Of these four subjects at least two must be chosen from those indicated by a double asterisk and at least one must be chosen from the subjects Growth and Development International Economics or Public Economics

(c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional work as the Head of the Department may prescribe

(d) pass Economics IV

THE HONOURS DEGREE - LEGAL STUDIES

A candidate for an honours degree shall-(a) complete all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of

Commerce degree before enrolling in Legal Studies IV4

(b) pass Legal Studies I and any four half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies or pass Legal Studies 1 Industrial Law and any two half-subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

(c) pass Legal Studies IV

EQUIVALENT HONOURS

On the recommendation of a Head of Department in the Faculty and with the permission of the Dean a graduate who in the discipline concerned has not completed the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student at this or any other Australian university may enrol in the honours programme either as a full-time or part-time student

Such a graduate who has completed all the requirements of the honours programme shall be issued with a statement to this effect by the Secretary to the University the statement shall indicate the honours level equivalent to the standard achieved by the student in completing the honours programme

4 A candidate for honours in Legal Studies may be permitted to undertake preliminary studies for Legal Studies IV prior to completing all the requirements for the ordinary Bachelor of Commerce degree

18

SCHEDULE B Subjects Group A Accounting I

Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I or an additional ArtsScience subject

Group B Accounting lIA ACCOUnting lIB

Administrative Law Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Financial Management

l+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract 1 Marketing Money amp Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Speci~1 Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy TaxatIon

middotThe Corporation amp Australian Society middotTrade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at PartGroup 2 level

Group C Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

tLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at partGroup 3 level

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject Candidates who pass any two of these may coupt each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject

19

+ Candidates Who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A partGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering course

Note 1 Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding subject(s) listed as prerequisite(s)

Subject

Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data

Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

llndustrial Relations III Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics

tLabour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Analysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp

Trustees Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation

Prerequisite

Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economics I or Economic History I Economics II or Economic History II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II Economics II One of Economics I Economic History I

or Legal Studies I Industrial Relations II Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I

20

Subject Prerequisite The Corporation amp Australian Society Legal Studies I Theories of Organisation Organisational Behaviour Theory of Economic Policy Economics II Trade Practices Law Legal Studies I May be taken as a corequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economics Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

t Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter

CONTENT OF SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES (ARTSSCIENCEMATHEMA TICS SUBJECTS)

Provision is made in the degree Requirements for students to attempt approved Arts or Science or Mathematics subjects Such subjects are those offered for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Mathematics provided the candidate complies with the requirements of the faculties concerned in relation to entry to the subject SUbjects offered by the Departments of Commerce Economics or Legal Studies in the above degree courses are not normally approved for this purpose An outline of the content of the appropriate subjects may be obtained from the handbooks of the Faculty of Arts Science Mathematics and Engineering

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

(Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce)

UNDERGRADUATES

l Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree in this University (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions -

21

(b)

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of more than five subjects in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University provided that (i) he complies with Clauses lei) l(iii)

Oi) he has his proposed course approvelt1 by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted and

(iii) he does not depart from his approved course without the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution (a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

middotNote An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course including details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Commerce degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the academic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

22

subjects passed at another university or approved tertiary institution on the following conditions -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject or subjects included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of more than two subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve standing in one additional subject

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(i) standing may be granted for one unspecified subject in the degree where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond in content with any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

GRADUATES

1 Graduates of this or another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution

middot~Note

(a) A graduate of this University or of another university or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of subjects passed in such university or approved tertiary institution provided that-

(i) each subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a s~bject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of this University

(ii) such a candidate shall not include in his course for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce any subject which is substantially equivalent to one he has previously passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) such a candidate seeking standing in more than four subjects must at the time of his first enrolment in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course have his entire course approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the heads of the departments concerned Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned

The degree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless he has whilst enrolled as a candidate for the Bachelor of Commerce degree at this University passed more tban half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has complied WIth By-Law 5813

23

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 1 (a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standmg for not more than four unspecified subjects at the time of admission-(Osuch a candidate after ~atisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed 10 accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce such a candidate shall include in his course passes in at least three Group C subjects chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

Details of transition arrangements for implementation from the beginning of the 1977 academic year are set out below he newcourses will be offered in 1977 with the exceptIOn of Industnal RelatIOns III which will first be offered in 1978 1977 will be a transition year in which 13 subjects will still be required to be passed by students in order to graduate at the end of the year Full impletnentation of the new degree will take effect in 1978 at the end of WhICh year only 12 subjects will be required

1 Compulsory subjects Accounting I Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methds are compulsory subjects Economics I IS not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Microeconomics Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have passed Economic Statistics 1

2 Counting of subjects (a) Except as otherwise provided subjects shall b~ counted on

the basis upon which they were offered at the tm~e (~g If a subject was passed when offered as a half subject It ~hall count as a half subject if passed when offered as a full subject it shall count as a full subject if passed when offered as a Group A subject it shall count as a Group A subject)

(b) Where former Group C half subjects are offered as GrolP B full subjects up to a maximum of two such Group B subjects passed can be counted as Group C subjects This conces~ion only applies to students who have passed not less than eIght subjects in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course pnor to 1977

(c) Students shall not include in their courses as a subject to count towards the new Bachelor of Commerce degree any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which they have previously passed

24

3 Conversion of subjects (a) To fulfil the degree requirements at the end of 1977 or

thereafter half subjects which were passed prior to 1977 may be converted into full subjects as set out below-

6 old half subjects will count as 4 full subjects 5 old half subjects will count as 3 full subjects 4 old half subjects will count as 2i full subjects 3 old half subjects will count as 2 full subjects 2 old half subjects will count as I full subject I old half subject will count as a half subject

t(b) Students who have one Group C half subject remaining after such a conversion may choose to -

(i) complete a full Group C subject in its place OR (ii) complete any other half subjeci in which case the two

together shall count as a full Group C subject OR (iii) complete half of a full Group C subject where this is

offered and approved by the Head of the appropriate department OR

(iv) successfully complete additional work of a type and standard determined by the Head of the Department concerned Such additional work shall count as an unspecified Group C half subject

4 Change from full subjects to half subjects (a) Students who have passed Legal Studies I prior to 1977 are

not permitted to count Law of Contract towards the degree (b) Students who have passed Legal Studies II are not permitted

to count Law of Business Organisation or Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy towards the degree

(c) Students who have passed Legal Studies III are not permitted to count Administrative Law The Corporation and Australian Society or Trade Practice Law towards the degree

(d) Students who have passed Legal Studies II and pass two Group B half subjects or Industrial Law may count such two half subjects or Industrial Law as one Group C subject

5 Limitations on enrolment Students who have passed a subject in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course prior to 1977 will continue to be subject to Clauses 5 to 8 of Schedule A of the 1976 degree requirements (eg they will be permitted to enrol in up to five subjects in the case of full-time students and up to three subjects in the case of part-time students in anyone year) Such students are exempted from the provisions of Clauses 5 amp 6 of Schedule A in the 1977 Bachelor of Commerce degree requirements

2S

6 Prerequisites (a) Where either Economics I or Economics II is a prerequisite

for any other subject a pass in either Microeconomics or Macroeconomics respectively shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

(b) Where introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for any other subject a pass in Economic Statistics I shall be deemed to satisfy such prerequisite requirement

7 Exceptional Circumstances In order to provide for exceptional circumstances ansmg in particular transition cases the Dean may relax any of the transition requirements

8 Prior transition arrangements

Note

(a) Students subject to prior transition arrangements are subject to these new transition arrangements except for the provisions in 8(b) 8(c) and 8(d) below

(b) Notwithstanding Clause 3(b) students who have passed Accounting IIA in 1971 or 1972 may include Taxation in their Bachelor of Commerce degree course

(c) Economics I and Introductory Quantitative Methods are not compUlsory for students who have passed Economics I prior to 1973

(d) To satisfy the degree requirements a student who was required to pass 14 subjects under the 1973 transition arrangements must pass 14 subjects at the end of 1976 l3 subjects at the end of 1977 or 12 subjects at the end of 1978 and thereafter

t It is likely that the Department of Commerce wi11 be able to arrange for students in the circumstances envisaged by sub-clauses (iii) and (iv) of clause 3(b) to undertake the following studies in 1977 1 INFORMATION SYSTEMS - pART I

(Half of full group C subject INFORMATION SYSTEMS) 2 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS-

Specified additional work (see subject description) 3 ACCOUNTING IlIA-PART I

(Half of the full group C subject ACCOUNTING IlIA)

COMBINED DEGREE COURSES

1 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Year I 2Engineering I 2Mathematics I Physics IA Chemistry IS

26

Units 4 4 4 2

Year I (continued) MEl21 Workshop Practice ME122 Process Technology MetI51 Microstructure of Materials

Year II EE2D3

uEE204 ME202 ME214 ME223 ME241

Yearm ME2Dl ME212 ME213 ME232 ME2S1 ME271

Year IV ME3Dl ME313 ME333 ME342 ME343 ME3S2 ME361 ME372 ME373

Year V CE3D3

ME381 ME383 ME413

ME414 ME449 ME487 ME496

Introduction to Electrical Information Introduction to Eectrical Energy Dynamics of Engmeering Systems Mechanics of Solids Mechanical Technology Properties of Materials

2Mathematics lIB 2Accounting I 2Economics I

Laboratory Measurements Engineering Design Engineering DeSign Dynamics of Machines Fluid Mechanics Thermodynamics

t 2Introductory Quantitative Methods 2Qne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Engineering Computations Engineering Design Dynamics of Machines Properties of Materials Mechanics of SOlids Fluid Mechanics Automatic Control Heat Transfer Thermodynamics

One Economcs amp Commerce subject Group B or C One EconomiCS amp Commerce subject Group C

Structural Design One unit ofshyMethods Engineering Quality Engineering Design ltfCrankshafts Flywheels amp other

Rotatmg Members Design f Hydrauic amp Pneumatic Power Systems Rehabllty AnalYSIS of Mechanical Systems OPlratlOns -esearch - Deterministic Models PrOject Semmar

lElectives 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

27

Units I 1 1

17

1 1 1 1 I 1 4 4 4

18

I 1 1middot I I 1 4 4 4

18

I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 4 4

17

2

4 S 4

16

Notes First half year

Second half year 1 Three electives must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives 11 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thosed marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 1m Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business AnalySis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

2 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

Year I Units 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2

MEl21 Workshop Practice 1 ME122 Process Technology I MetlS1 Microstructure of Materials I

17 Year II

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information bull EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy bull ME202 Dynamics of Engineering Systems I ME2l4 Mechanics of Solids I ME223 Mechanical Technology I ME241 Properties of Materials I

2Mathematics liB 4 2Accounting I 4 2Economics I 4

18 Yearlli

ME20 Laboratory Measurements I ME2l2 Engineering Design bull ME213 Engineering Design I ME232 Dynamics of Machines I ME2S1 Fluid Mechanics I ME271 Thermodynamics 1

t2Introductory Quantitative Methods 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 4

18 Year IV

ME301 Engineering Computations 1 ME313 Engineering Design I ME333 Dynamics of Machines I ME342 Properties of Materials bull ME343 Mechanics of Solids I ME361 Automatic Control I

28

Year IV (continued) ME381 Methods Engineering ME383 Quality Engineering ME384 Design for Production ME487 Operations Research - Deterministic Models ME488 Operations Research - Probabilistic Models

Year V ME496

2ME681

Notes

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

ProjectSeminar Industrial Law

2Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

First half year Second half year

Units I 1 1

bull 1 4

15

4 4 4 5

17

1 Three elective units must be chosen from the list of Departmental Electives bull The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus

six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

3 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

MEl21

Year II

Year III

2Chemistry I 2Mathematics I Engineering I Physics IAm Workshop Practice

Chemical Engineering I Chemistry II

2Mathematics lIB Part 1 2 Accounting I

Chemical Engineering IIA 2Mathematics 1m Part 2 2Economics I

plntroductory Quantitative Methods

29

4 4 4 4

bull 17

6 5 2 4

17

7 2 4 4

17

middot Year IV

Year V

Chemical Engineering TIB tOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B zOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B Elective II

Chemical Engineering III Project II

ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

Units 3 4 4 4 3

18

5 6 4 4

19 Notes

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normalIy taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

4 BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL ENGINEEJING

Vearl 2Engineering I 4 2Mathematics I 4 PhysicsIA 4 Chemistry IS 2 Engineering Surveying 2

16

Yearn 2Mathematics lIB 4

CE212 Mechanics of Solids 1 CE221 Properties of Materials 1 CE222 Materials Technology 2 CE231 Fluid Mechanics I 1 CE241 Water Resources Engineering 2 CE223J Engineering Geology I

EE203 Introduction to Electrical Information 1 EE204 Introduction to Electrical Energy I

2Accounting I 4

18

YearnI MEI21 Workshop Practice I ME271 Thermodynamics I CE313 Structural Analysis amp Design I 4 CE324 Soil Mechanics 2 CE332 Fluid Mechanics II 2 CE3S1 Civil Engineering Systems 1 ME30l Engineering Computations I CE372 Transporta tion Engineering 1

2Economics I 4

17

30

Year IV CE414 CE425 CE4S2 CE453

Year V

Notes

Structural Analysis amp Design II Earth amp Rock Engineering Engineering Construction Project

i 2Introductory Quantitative Methods ZOne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B or C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C

First half year Second half year

Units 4 I 2 2 4 4

17

4 4 4 4

16

2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are those marked 2 plus six Engineering units chosen from subjects normally taken in Year III or Year IV of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

i Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Year I

EEI31 CEllI MEllI ME1I2 ME131 Met182

ME121

Yearn EE211 EE221 EE232

PH221

2Mathematics I 2tEngineering

Circuit Fundamentals Statics Graphics Engineering Drawing amp Elementary Design

tDynamics Electronic Structure of Materials PhysicsIA Chemistry IS Workshop Practice

Energy Conversion Semiconductor Devices

tElectrical Circuits 2Mathematics lIB Electromagnetics amp Quantum Mechanics

2Accounting I 2Economics I

31

4 4

1 1 4 2 I

17

1 1 I 4 2 4 4

17

Year ill EE313 EE314 EE323 EE325 EE331 EE341 EE344 EE361

Power Systems tElectrical Machinery tLinear Electronics tIntroduction to Digital Systems

Circuits Automatic Control

tCommunications Computer Structure Machines amp Assembly Language One from EE300 EE400

2tlntroductory Quantitative Metho~s 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B

Year IV

Year V EE480491

Five from EE300 EE400 EE500 20ne Economics amp Commerce sub~ect Group B 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group B lElectives

Project Seminar Three from EE300 EE400 EE50C

20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C 20ne Economics amp Commerce subject Group C lElectives

Units 1 1 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1middot 1 1 4 4

17

5 4 4 4

17

4 3 4 4 2

17

Notes tIt t 1 The six elective units must be taken in the Fa~ulty of ~ngl~eenng a eas wo

must be from within the Department of Electrical Engineering 2 The subjects which count towards the BCom degree are thse marked 2 plus

six Engineering units ehosen from subjects normally taken In 3rd or 4th year of the full-time Engineering programme which may be counted as one Group C subject

t Subjects under change from 1976 to 1977 + Introductory Quantitative Methods is not ~ compulso~y subject for studentJ + who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Tltgtplc H a~d Yho pr~cee

directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysls Quantitative BUSiness Analysis II or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Year I

Year II

BACHELOR OF COMMERCEBACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

Mathematics I tlntroductory Quantitative Methods

Economics I Accounting I

Mathematics IIA Mathematics IIC Economics amp Commerce Group A or B

32

Hours 6 3 4 4

17

6 6 4

16

Yearm

Year IV

Year V

Mathematics IlIA Economics amp Commerce Group A or B Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Mathematics IIIB or a part III Schedule B subject from the requirements for the BMath

Economics amp Commerce Group B Economics amp Commerce Group B

Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C Economics amp Commerce Group C

Units 6 4 3 3

16

6 4 3

13

3 3 3

9

t Introductory Quantitative Methods is not a compulsory subject for students who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H and who proceed directly to Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis or Commercial Electronic Data Processing

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

1 In the Requirements unless the contrary intention appears the Faculty means the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and the Faculty Board means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce

2 The degree of Bachelor of Economics may be conferred as an ordinary degree or as an honours degree

3 (a) The Annual Examinations shall normally be held at the end of third term

(b) A candidate may be granted a Special Examination in accordance with the provisions of By-law 593 sections 5 6 and 7

4 Except in Economics IV the results of successful candidates at Annual and Special Examinations shall be classified Pass Credit Distinction High Distinction

5 (a) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification

(b) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty The relevant date shall be

33

(i) in the case of any half subject offered in the first half of the academic year - the eighth Monday in first term

(ii) in the case of any half subject offered in the second half of the academic year - the second Monday in third term

(iii) in the case of any other subject - the sixth Monday in second term

6 A graduate or an undergraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing in recognition of any subject passed in such university or approved tertiary institution on conditions to be determined by the Faculty

Board1

7 (a) To complete a subject qualifying towards the degree hereinafter called a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures tutorials seminars laboratory classes and field work and submit such written work as the Department or Departments concerned shall require

(b) To pass a subject a candidate shall satisfy the requirements of the previous clause and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board concerned shall require

(c) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a subject shall qualify towards a degree for no more than eight years from the year in which it was passed

8 The minimum time for a course qualifying for an ordinary degree is three years except in those cases where candidates are granted

standing 9 (a) Candidates for an honours degree shall pass the prescribed

qualifying subjects in not more than five years in the case of the full-time course and not more than eight years in the case of the part-time course from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty The Faculty Board may vary these provisions

(b) Honours shall be awarded in Economics (c) There shall be three classes of Honours namely - Class I

Class II and Class Ill Class n shall have two divisions namely Division I and Division II

10 (a) Applicants for admission as candidates for honours shall apply to the Head of the Department concerned at the commencement of their second year of full-time studies or their third year of part-time studies except that the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department concerned may admit a candidate at some later year of enrolment in the degree programme

1 Refer to Conditions for Granting of Standing to Graduates and Undergraduates of this or of other universities or approved t~rtiary institutions

34

(b) Prior to entering Economics IV dd pass all the prescribed subjects ~na Istte~ fodr honous must the Faculty Bo d h an ar prescrIbed by the Department~on~re~ recommendation of the Head of

11 (a) To qualify for the degree a dd h selected in conformity with t~an I da~~s all pass ~he subjects A to these Req e con ltions set out 10 Schedule

ulrements (b) Th If Sc~ed~re Il~g t~Uebs~eecRts fo~ the degree shall be those listed in

eqU1re~ents

12 Combined Degree Course2

A candidate may compl t th R Economics degree in co~j~nc~iolleq~~ment~ for the Bachelor of

~~ ~~P~~~~ft c~t~~~eo~i~rse a~~r~~~~~~hai~~~~~~ id appropriat~ ~aculty Board pr~vi~~d th~~merce and the other

(I) AdmiSSion to a combined course shall end of the first year and shall b b normally be at the the Deans of the two Faculties ceosu Jectdto the approval of

(ii) Ad ncerne

mission to combined co II b

(1

11) with an average of at leastU~~~~~llevelrestricted to students

The Deans of both F If fi Head(s) of Departm ~() les a ter consultation with the work in the combin~~ d conc~rned shall certify that the quality than if the two de ~~r~~a~~~ s~ qua~tity and

(iv) An approved combined parate y of both degrees course shall satisfy the requirements

13 In order to provide for exce f I particular cases the Senate p 1O~~ circumstances arising in Faculty Board may relax any reon e recommendatton of the qUlrement

Advice to enrolling students

Before enrolling in any subject leadi Economics degree all students shoufJ to t~ellaward of a Bach~lor of care u y note the followmg

1 The Dean in the app f f may approve enrolm~~ l~~ ~ condltIO~S 4 and 5 of Schedule A additional subject in any one ye~~e~~e I~S~~~~ standing in one

(a) A student seeking to enrol th fi who will graduate if h 10 e nal year of the course five points in the case ~f ~asrf t~ubJect~ carrying a total of in the case of a part-time stu~e~t~me stu ent or three points

~ Combined degree courses will not be offered in 1977

3~

THE HONOURS DEGREE

A candidate for an honours degree shall -(a) complete all the requirement~ f~r the ordinary Bachelor of

Economics degree before enrollIng m EconomIcs IV (b) pass at least one of Growth and DevelollImetEIntern~tionIVal

Economics or Public Economics before enro mg m conomlCS (c) pass Economics Honours Seminar I and II or such additional

work as the Head of the Department may prescribe before enrolling in Economics IV

(d) pass Economics IV

Subjects Group A

Group B

SCHEDULE B

Accounting I Economics I Economic History I Introductory Quantitative Methods Legal Studies I One ArtsScience subject Mathematics I OR an additional ArtsScience subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB

bull Administrative Law Business and Consumer Credit Law

Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems

Consumer Protection Law Economics II Economic History II Economic Statistics II or Statistical AnalYSIS Financial Management

1+Industrial Law Industrial Relations II Industry Economics Labour Economics

Law of Business Organisations

La w of Contract IMarketing

Corresponding Points

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 05 10 10 05 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 05 OS 10 10 10 Money and Banking

lOrganisational Behaviour Quantitative Business Analysis II

Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy 10 OS 10

Group C

Taxation The Corporation and Australian Society Trade Practices Law One ArtsScienceMathematics subject taken at

PartGroup 2 level Accounting IlIA Accounting IIIB Auditing Econometrics I Economic History III

38

OS OS 10

10 10 10 10 10

Corresponding Subjects

Growth and Development History of Economic Thought Information Systems International Economics

Points 10 10 10 10 10 10 ~O 10 10 10

jLabour Relations Mathematical Economics Public Economics Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy

20ne ArtsScienceMathematicsEngineering subject taken at PartGroup 3 level 20

(For Group C subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies see bull and + below)

bull For the purpose of satisfying the conditions in Schedule A asterisked subjects shall each count as a half subject with a corresponding point value of OS Candidates who pass any two of these may count each and any grouping of two further asterisked subjects as a Group C subject with a corresponding combined point value of 10

+ Candidates who pass any two of the asterisked subjects plus Industrial Law may count either those two subjects OR Industrial Law as a Group C subject

+ Industrial Relations III will replace Labour Relations in 1978 and thereafter 1 A candidate may not enrol in these subjects unless he has passed at least one

Group A subject 2 A PartGroup 3 level Engineering subject is defined as any six Engineering units

chosen from subjects normally taken in the third or fourth year of the full-time Engineering programme

Note Not all subjects listed in Schedule B will necessarily be offered in anyone year

PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS

Before enrolling in any subject listed in the left hand column below a candidate shall have passed the corresponding sUbject(s) listed as prerequisite(s) Subject Accounting IIA Accounting lIB Accounting lIlA Accounting IIlB Administrative Law Auditing Business amp Consumer Credit Law Commercial Electronic Data Processing Comparative Economic Systems Consumer Protection Law Econometrics I

Economics II Economic History II Economic History III Economic Statistics II Financial Management Growth amp Development

Prerequisite Accounting I Accounting I Accounting IIA amp Accounting lIB Accounting lIB Legal Studies I

lAccounting IIA Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Economics I Legal Studies I Economic Statistics II or Statistical

Analysis Economics I Economic History I or Economics I Economic History II or Economics II

21ntroductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Economics II

39

SUbject History of Economic Thought Industrial Relations II

Industry Economics Information Systems International Economics Labour Economics Labour Relations Law of Business Organisations Law of Contract Mathematical Economics Money amp Banking Public Economics Quantitative Business Al1alysis II Securities Analysis Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees

Bankruptcy Statistical Analysis Taxation The Corporation amp Australian Society Theories of Organisation Theory of Economic Policy Trades Practices Law

1 May be taken as a corequisite

Prerequisite Economics II Economics I or Economic History I or

Legal Studies I Economics I Commercial Electronic Data Processing Economics II Economics I Labour Economics Legal Studies I Legal Studies I Economics II Economics I Economics II

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Financial Management Legal Studies I

2Introductory Quantitative Methods Accounting I Legal Studies I Organisational Behaviour Economics II Legal Studies I

2 Introductory Quantitative Methods is a prerequisite for Economic Statistics II Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing except that candidates who have successfully completed Mathematics lIB Topic H may proceed directly to Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis Quantitative Business Analysis II and Commercial Electronic Data Processing

CONDITIONS FOR GRANTING OF STANDING TO UNDERGRADUATES AND GRADUATES OF THIS

OR OF OTHER UNIVERSITIES OR APPROVED TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS DEGREE

( Determined by the Faculty Board Faculty of Economics and Commerce under powers given to it in Clause 6 of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics)

UNDERGRADUATES

1 Undergraduates not previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics in this University-(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate

of this or another university or of an approved tertiary institution in recognition of any subject passed in such an institution on the following conditions

40

(i) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of his admission to that other university or approved tertiary institution or has achieved a satisfactory record in the equivalent of two years full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution

(ii) the subject for which standing is sought shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University

(iii) such an undergraduate shall not receive standing in respect of subjects carrying a total of more than five points in the degree course save that in the case of an undergraduate transferring from another degree course in this University he may be allowed standing for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both degree courses

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause l(ii) an undershygraduate of this or of another university or of an approved tertiary institution may be granted standing for one subject which does not have a reasonable correspondence with a subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this University provided that-

(i) he complies with Clauses I (i) I (iii) (ii) he has his proposed course approved by the Faculty

Board at the time the concession is granted and (iii) he does not depart from his approved course without

the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned

2 Undergraduates who have passed subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University and seek to complete the requirements for the degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary institution

middotNote

(a) The Faculty Board may grant standing to an undergraduate previously enrolled in the Bachelor of Economics degree course in this University in recognition of any subject or

An undergraduate wishing to obtain the benefit of these sections must apply in writing to the Dean for approval of the proposed course by the last day for the return of re-enrolment forms for continuing students The students must supply full and complete details of the proposed course induding details of the content of individual subjects The Dean will consult Heads of Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission for the Faculty Board A course approved by the Faculty Board will be specific and will be for one academic year only The Faculty Board will determine the extent of standing to be granted in the Bachelor of Economics degree if the approved course is completed successfully If the approved course is not completed within the a~demic year specified by the Faculty Board a student wishing to gain standing under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing

41

1

(b)

subjects passed at anot~er univ~~sity or approved tertiary institution on the followmg conditIOns -

(i) the subject or subjects passed shall h~ve a reasonab~e correspondence with a subject or subjects mcluded III

Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics

(ii) standing shall not be granted in respect of ~ore than two subjects in the Bachelor of Economics degree except that in special circunstances ~he Dean may approve standing in one addltlona~ subject

Notwithstanding the provisions of 2a(l) standmg may be granted for one unspecified subject in t~e d~gree where the subject or subjects passed at the other uIlverslty or a~proved tertiary institution do not correspond In c(mtent With any subject included in Schedule B of the Requirements for the degree of Bachelor of this University

GRADUATES

Graduates of this or anoth~r univ~rsi~y or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary mst~tutl~n (a) A graduate of this or another un~versl~y or graduates or

diplomates of an approv~d tertiary lnstltutlOn ~ay be granted standing In recogn~tlOn of sUbJects passed In such university or approved mstltutlOn provided that -(i) each subject for which standing is sou~ht s~all havea

reasonable correspondence with a subject Illcluded III

Schedule B of the Requireflents for the degree of Bachelor of Economics of this Umverslty

Oi) a candidate shall not include in his cour~e for ~he degree of Bachelor of Economics any subject 7hlCh is substantially equivalent to one he has prevIOusly passed and for which standing has not been granted

(iii) a candidate seeking standing in subjects carrying a total of more than four points must at the tme of hiS first enrolment in the Bachelor of Economics degree course have his entire course apprved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendatIOn of the h~ads f the departments concer~ed Susequent varIatIOns In this prescribed course Will reqUlrethe approval of the Dean acting on the recommendatIOn of the Heads of the Departments concerned

Note hl II d The de ree shall not be awarded to a candidate unless ~e ha~ w st enro e as a candidte for the Bachelor of Economics degree at this Umverslty passed mllt)f~ than half the total number of subjects required for the degree and has comp Ie with By-Law 5813

42

(b) Notwithstanding Clause l(a) a Graduate or Diplomate of an approved tertiary institution may seek standing for not more than four unspecified subjects carrying a total of not more than four points at the time of admission -(i) such a candidate after satisfying the requirements for

matriculation shall have completed a three year full-time diploma course in teaching in 1972 or subsequent years

(ii) in addition to the subjects selected and passed in accordance with the requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Economics such a candidate shall include in his course passes in Group C subjects carrying at least a total of three points chosen from Schedule B of those requirements

POSTGRADUATE COURSES

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the Departments of Commerce Economics and Legal Studies leading to the Diploma in Business Studies and to MCom and PhD degrees

In the Department of Economics study for the MCom degree may be either by research and thesis or by coursework This degree by coursework should appeal to those candidates whose special interest lies in the area of Industrial Economics However postgraduate candidates with other interests will be able to choose courses designed to cater for their particular requirements Candidates for the coursework degree programme are advised to write to the Head of the Department of Economics The Department of Economics also accepts candidates for MA degrees

In the Department of Commerce and the Department of Legal Studies the degree of Master of Commerce may at present be taken only by research and thesis Whether the applicant desires to take the Master of Commerce degree in the Department of Economics the Department of Commerce or the Department of Legal Studies he should normally hold the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or an appropriate degree from any other approved university but in any case must satisfy the Faculty Board of his ability to carry out the programme of study and research

The Faculty also has a course leading to the award of a Diploma in Business Studies The subjects which may be included in the Diploma course are specified in the Appendix to the Requirements (see page 45) Enquiries concerning the course in the Diploma in Business Studies should be directed to the Department of Commerce

The Diploma in Business Studies if including passes in certain specified subjects satisfies the examination requirements for advancement to

43

Stage 2

Two subjects selected from Groups A and B plus Group C Group A Subject Accounting lIlA Accounting IIIB

Subject Auditing Econometrics I

Labour Relations or Industrial Relations III

Securities Analysis Theories of Organisation Other subjects in the ordinary

Bachelor of Commerce degree programme as approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose

1 Group B Subject

2 Accounting amp Financial Studies Accounting Theory Advanced Company Law

Advanced Auditing Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework

in Business Business Application of Statistical

Prerequisite Accounting IlA amp lIB Accounting liB

Advisory prerequisite The advisory prerequisite subjects for these subjects are those prescribed as prerequisites in the Bachelor of Commerce Degree Course

Advisory prerequisite

Accounting IlIA Legal Studies II or Law of Business

Organisation Auditing Financial Management Taxation Organisational Behaviour

Introductory Quantitative Methods Decision Theory

Comparative International Taxation Taxation Commercial Programming Commercial Electronic Data Processing Corporate Strategy Organisational Behaviour Advanced Managerial amp Industrial Accounting lIB

Accounting International amp Interstate Business Law Legal Studies I or Law of Contract Law of Stamp Death Gift amp Estate Legal Studies II or Law of Contract

Duties Law of Business Organisation amp Special Contracts Executors amp Trustees BankrUptcy

Marketing Organisational Behaviour Legal Studies I

Marketing Management Personnel Management Politieal amp Legal Institutions Quantitative Applications in

Management Studies Research amp Development in

Accounting Practice Social amp Public Authority Accounting Systems Analysis amp Design

Group C Research Essay

Quantitative Business Analysis II

Accounting lIA

Accounting I Commercial Electronic Data Processing

46

Note

EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE APPENDIX TO REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 In addition to Accounting and Financial Studies nine (9) other group B subjects will probably be offered in 1977 It is likely that the remaining subjects will be as follows

Advanced Financial Management Advanced Taxation or Comparative International Taxation Behavioural amp Social Framework in Business Commercial Programming Corporate Strategy International amp Interstate Business Law Marketing Management Political amp Legal Institutions Systems Analysis amp Design

2 This subject will be offered on the following conditions-(i) the subject is restricted to students who have not previously

passed any accounting examinations at tertiary leveL (ii) the subject may be incorporated in Stage I only

CONDITIONS FOR THE GRANTING OF STANDING IN THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES COURSE

1 Standing in a subject in the Diploma in Business Studies shall require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce

2 A candidate will not be eligible for standing in any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma except as otherwise provided for in succeeding clauses

3 A candidate who has passed a subject1 offered in the postgraduate course in Professional Accounting Studies in the years 1969 1970 1971 or 1972 shall be granted standing in the corresponding subject in the Diploma in Business Studies provided he enrols in the Diploma within five years of having passed such subject

4 A candidate who has been awarded the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) Degree specialising in Accounting in the University of Newcastle shall be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

5 A candidate who has passed either (i) the Master of Commerce qualifying course or (ii) the equivalent of one full-time year of the course work under clause 9(ii) of the present Master of Commerce

lAuditing Taxation and Tax Planning andor Accounting Systems and Computer Applications

47

requirements within the Department of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or who has been awarded the degree of Master of Commerce for work completed as a student registered in that Department shall normally be granted standing in the subject Accounting Theory

6 A graduate of im approved institution who has completed the honours degree specialising in Accounting or who has completed postgraduate studies considered equivalent to those specified in paragraph (5) above may be granted standing on the same basis as a graduate of the University of Newcastle

7 Where a candidate has completed Stage 1 of the Diploma Course he may be granted standing by the Faculty Board in respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary institution under the following conditions-(a) the subject for which standing is granted shall have a reasonable

correspondence with a sllbject included in the Diploma in Business Studies programme and

(b) standing shall not be granted for more than two subjects

TRANSITIONAL ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE DIPLOMA IN BUSINESS STUDIES

1 Any subject passed will count on the basis upon which it was offered eg if a subject was passed when offered as a half subject it will count as a half subject If a subject was passed when offered as a full subject it will count as one subject

2 Candidates who have successfully completed one half subject only may count it as one subject by - (a) Completing a full Group A or B subject In Its place

or (b) Completing half of a full Group A subject w~ere this is offered

and approved by the Head of the appropnate Department

3 Candidates who have successfully completed more than one half Group A subject will be given the following standing--

4 half subjects passed under 1976 requIrements wIll be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

3 half subjects passed under 1976 requirements Will be given standing for 2 Group A subjects under 1977 requi~ements

2 half subjects passed under 1976 reqUirements WIll be given standing for] Group A subject under 1977 requirements

4 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include Industrial Law andor two half subjects selected from

Administrative Law The Corporation amp Australian Society Trade Practices Law

48

in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or ]978 except that candidates who have completed the subject Legal Studies III may not enrol in any half subjects offered by the Department of Legal Studies

5 Candidates enrolled in 1976 in the Diploma in Business Studies may include one subject selected from Financial Management Taxation Marketing or Quantitative Business Analysis II (which are offered in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course) in his course as a Group A subject in 1977 or 1978

6 A candidate shall not include in his future programme counting towards the Diploma in Business Studies any subject which is equivalent to part or all of a subject which he has previously passed

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMMERCE

1 The degree of Master of Commerce shall be awarded in one grade only

2 An application to register as a candidate for the degree of Master of Commerce shall be made on the prescribed form and shall be lodged with the Secretary at least one full calendar month before the commencement of the term in which the candidate desires to register

3 (i) An applicant for registration for the degree shall have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce in the University of Newcastle or to an appropriate degree of this or any other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce (hereinafter referred to as the Faculty Board)

(ii) In exceptional cases an applicant possessing other qualifications may on the recommendation of the Faculty Board be permitted by the Senate to register as a candidate for the degree

4 The Faculty Board may require an applicant to demonstrate fitness for registration by carrying out such work and sitting for such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine

5 An applicant for registration shall apply to pursue his studies for the degree of Master of Commerce in either of two ways The first shall consist primarily of research and the submission of a thesis The second shall consist of a programme of lectures and other coursework and the submission of a dissertation (hereinafter referred to as research and thesis and coursework and dissertation respectively)

49

6 Before permitting an applicant to register as a candidate for the degree the Faculty Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and other facilities are available

7 An applicant for registration shall have his programme and in the case of a candidate for the degree by research and thesis the subject of his thesis approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department before being permitted to register

8 A candidate shall register as either a full-time or a part-time student

9 (i) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall pursue his investigations under the direction of a supervisor appointed by the Faculty Board

(ii) Such a candidate may be required to attend such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study and pass such examinations at such standard as the Faculty Board may determine before being permitted to proceed with his programme of researchl

(iii) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of a thesis embodying the results of an original investigation and may be examined orally on the subject of his thesis

210 (i) A candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall pursue a course of formal study by attending such lecture courses seminars and other supervised study as the Faculty Board may determine

(ii) Such a candidate who has obtained an appropriate Bachelors degree with Honours or has postgraduate qualifications may be granted such advanced standing as the Faculty Board recommends

(iii) The progress of such a candidate not granted advanced standing under the preceding sub-clause shall be reviewed on the completion of three terms of full-time study (or the equivalent part-time) and if the candidate is deemed to have achieved a standard equivalent to Honours Class II his registration as a candidate for the degree shall be confirmed

(iv) Such a candidate shall be examined by means of written annual examinations in the subjects studied and by a dissertation on a topic approved by the Faculty Board and at the discretion of the examiner he may also be examined orally on the subjects studied or the dissertation

11 The degree shall not be conferred on a full-time student before the lapse of six complete terms and on a part-time student before the lapse of nine complete terms from the date on which the registration becomes effective save that in the case of a candidate

50

who has obtained the degree of Bachelor with Honours or who has had lengthy research experience this period may be reduced by the Faculty Board by up to three terms for full-time students and four terms for part-time students

212 Except with the permission of the Faculty Board a candidate for the degree by coursework and dissertation shall submit a dissertation not later than the last day of the first vacation subsequent to the second full-time or the fourth part-time year of registration

13 The Faculty Board may permit a candidate to change his registration from a programme of coursework and dissertation to one of research and thesis or vice versa on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may determine

14 (i) Three copies of the thesis or dissertation shall be submitted so as to comply with the requirements of the University

(ii) The University may retain the three copies of the thesis or dissertation submitted for examination and shall be free to allow them to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions of the Copyright Act (1968) as amended the University may issue the thesis or dissertation in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

15 A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners may with the permission of the Senate re-submit his thesis or dissertation in an amended form andor present himself again for the prescribed examinations on such terms and conditions as the Faculty Board may recommend If he fails to satisfy the examiners at the second attempt he shaIl not be eligible to submit himself again as a candidate for the degree

16 Notwithstanding the generality of any of these conditions the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any condition in order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in particular cases

1 Refer to Policy in Relation ~o the Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of The Requireshyments for the Degree of Master of Commerce below

2 The Degree by Coursework and Dissertation is only offered in the Department of Economics at present and further details of this degree course are available in the Brochure Graduate Studies in Economics

Policy in Relation to tbe Operation of Clause 9 (ii) of tbe Requirements for tbe Degree of Master of Commerce

1 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be permitted to proce~d with his programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work

si

2 In the normal case a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree in the University of Newcastle shall be required to satisfactorily complete not more than one additional full-time years work or its equivalent

3 In the case of a student whose programme extends over more than three terms permission to proceed with his research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the programme specified by the Faculty Board

4 Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be required to satisfactorily complete a programme equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates with the proviso that such a candidate may be required to complete additional work in order to undertake a particular research programme and thesis An honours graduate from another university shall be permitted to proceed with a programme of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless it is essential to his particular programme

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

I The degree of Doctor of Philosophy may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate to a candidate who has satisfied the following requirements

2 A candidate for registration for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall-

(i) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of master or the degree of bachelor with first or second class honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing or

(ii) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to the degree of bachelor with third class honours or without honours in the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as having equivalent standing and have achieved by subsequent work and study a standard recognised by the Senate as equivalent to at least second class honours

(iii) or in exceptional cases submit such other evidence of general and professional qualifications as may be approved by the Senate

3 The Senate may require a candidate before he is permitted to register to undergo such examination or carry out such work as it may prescribe

52

4 A candidate for registration for a course of study leading to the degree of PhD shall-(i) apply on the prescribed form at least one calendar month

before the commencement of the term in which he desires to register and

(ii) submit with his application a certificate from the Head of the Department in which he proposes to study stating that the candidate is a fit person to undertake a course of study or research leading to the PhD degree and that the Department is willing to undertake the responsibility of supervising the work of the candidate

5 Before being admitted to candidature an applicant shall satisfy the Senate that he can devote sufficient time to his advanced study and research

6 Subsequent to registration the candidate shall pursue a course of advanced study and research for at least nine academic terms save that any candidate who before registration was engaged upon research to the satisfaction of the Senate may be exempted from three academic terms

7 A candidate shall present himself for examination not later than fifteen academic terms from the date of his registration unless special permission for an extension oftime be granted by the Senate

8 (a) The course shall be carried out in a Department of the University

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this clause a candidate may be granted special permission by the Senate to spend a period of not more than three academic terms in research at another institution approved by the Senate

(c) The course shall be carried out under the direction of a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Senate

9 Not later than three academic terms after registration the candidate shall submit the subject of his thesis for approval by the Senate After the subject has been approved it may not be changed except with the permission of the Senate

10 A candidate may be required to attend a formal course of study appropriate to his work

II On completing his course of study every candidate shall submit a thesis which complies with the following requirements-(i) The greater proportion of the work described must have been

completed subsequent to registration for the PhD degree (ii) It must be a distinct contribution to the knowledge of the

subject

53

(iii) It must be written in English or in a language approved by the Senate and reach a satisfactory standard of literary presentation

12 The thesis shall consist of the candidates own account of his research In special cases work done conjointly with other persons may be accepted provided the Senate is satisfied on the candidates part in the joint research

13 Every candidate shall be required to submit with his thesis a short abstract of the thesis comprising not more than 300 words

14 A candidate may not submit as the main content of his thesis any work or material which he has previously submitted for a university degree or other similar award

15 The candidate shall give in writing three months notice of his intention to submit his thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by the appropriate fee

16 Four copies of the thesis shall be submitted together with a certificate from the supervisor that the candidate has completed the course of study prescribed in his case and that the thesis is fit for examination

17 The thesis shall be in double-spaced typescript The original copy for deposit in the Library shall be prepared and bound in a form approved by the University Th other th~eecopies shall be bltgtund in such manner as allows their transmission to the exammers without possibility of disarrangement

18 It shall be understood that the University retains four copies of the thesis and is free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed Subject to the provisions ofthe Copyright Act (1968) the U~versity may issue the thesis in whole or in part in photostat or microfilm or other copying medium

19 The candidate may also submit as separate supporting documents any work be has published whether or not it bears on the subject of the thesis

20 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

21

22

23

24

The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work The result of the examination shall be in accordance With the decision of a majority of the examiners A candidate permitted to re-submit his thesis for examinatio~ shall do so within a period of twelve months from the date on which he is advised of the result of the first examination In exceptional circumstances the Senate may relax any of these Requirements

54

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

1 The degree of Doctor of Science may be awarded by the Council on the recommendation of the Senate for an original contribution or contributions of distinguished merit adding to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of learning with which the Faculty is concerned

2 An applicant for registration for the degree of Doctor of Science shall hold a degree of the University of Newcastle or a degree from another university recognised by the Senate as being equivalent or shall have been admitted to the status of such a degree

3 The degree shall be awarded on published1 work although additional unpublished work may also be considered

4 Every candidate in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he deems appropriate shall submit a short discourse describing the research embodied in his submission The discourse shall make clear the extent of originality and the candidates part in any collaborative work

5 An applicant for registration for the degree shall submit in writing to the Secretary a statement of his academic qualifications together with-(a) four copies of the work published or unpublished which he

desires to submit and (b) a Statutory Declaration indicating those sections of the work

if any which have been previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any other university

6 The Senate shall appoint three examiners of whom at least two shall not be members of the teaching staff of the University

7 The examiners may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning his work

8 The result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners

lIn these requirements the term published work shall mean printed in a periodical or as a pamphlet or as a book readily available to the public The examiners are given discretion to disregard any of the work submitted if in their opinion the work has not been so available for criticism

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Lists are set out in a standard format to facilitate easy reference The policy adopted in this Handbook for interpretation of the various sections is set out below This may not neceslmrily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks

55

(I) Name The official subject name as included in Schedule of the degree requirements This name must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment

(2) Prerequisites Before enrolling in the subject a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites In some cases an advisory prerequisite is stated and although this is not compulsory it would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject An advisory prerequisite may be stated in terms of NSW Higher School Certificate subjects A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently in the prerequisite subject

(3) Corequisite A corequisite is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject if not previously passed

(4) Hours Formal sessions which students should attend Each lecture is of one hour duration and although the normal lecture requirement is for 2 lecture hours per week the lectures need not necessarily be held consecutively Students should read the Timetable for details

(5) Examination The formal examination requirements are stated however progressive assessment is used in most cases and students are required to submit essays exercises and in Accounting I a practice set as specified by lecturers and tutors Class tests may also be held during the year Work completed during the year will be taken into account with a students results at the final examination Failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from examinations

(6) Content An outline of subject content

(7) Suggested Preliminary Reading A list of reading material which should help the student gain a basic understanding of a subject This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject

(8) Texts Essential books which are recommended for purchase

(9) References Students should not restrict their reading to texts and othr references are listed to cover various aspects of the subject Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topic

56

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

411100 Accounting I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial houn per week

Two 3-hour papers

An analysis of the accounting function in the social structure the historical cost model of income measurement and asset valuation Alternative systems of accounting measurement - current purchasshying power current value Various types of entities partnerships companies manufacturing and non-trading concerns An introshyduction to basic techniques of management accounting including allocation of overheads product costing and budgeting Analysis and interpretation of financial statements funds statements and an introshyduction to business finance A brief survey of external influences on accounting

Texts Bums T J amp

Hendrickson H S Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R W

References Barton A D

Buckley J W amp Lightner K M

Carey J L

Chambers R J Colditz B T amp

Gibbins R Wmiddot Davidson S et al Gibson G J amp

Gillard R A Gole V L

The Accounting Sampler 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill)

A ustralian Accounting The Basis for Business Decisions 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill)

Accountancy Exercises (University of Newcastle)

The Anatomy of Accounting (Queensland UP)

Accounting An Information Systems Approach (Dickenson)

The Rise of the Accounting Profession Vols I amp II (AICPA)

Accounting and Action (Law Book Co) Study Guide to Australian Accounting

(McGraw-Hill) Financial Accounting (Dryden) The Accounting Process (Butterworths)

Fitzgeralds Analysis and Interpretation of Financial and Operating Statements (Butterwollths)

57

Beck G W

Bray F S Chambers R J

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp Bell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B (eds)

Gilman S Goldberg L Goldberg L

Henderson S amp Peirson G

Hendriksen E S Hendriksen E S amp

Budge B P Jay W R C amp

Mathews R L Johnston T R

et al Levy V M

Littleton A C

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G Murphy M E

Normanton E L

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Ross H

Staubus G J

Public Accountants in Australia Their Social Role (Australian Accounting Research Foundation)

The Accounting Mission (Melbourne UP) Accounting Evaluation and Economic

Behaviour (Prentice-Hall) An Income Approach to Accounting Theory

(Prentice-Hall) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) Readings in Accounting Theory

(Houghton Mifflin) Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) Concepts of Depreciation (Law Book Co) An Inquiry into the Nature of Accounting

(Amercan Accounting Assn) Issues in Financial Accounting (Cheshire)

Accounting Theory (Irwin) Contemporary Accounting Theory

(Dickenson) Government Accounting in Australia

(Cheshire) Law and Practice of Company Accounting

in Australia (Butterworths) Public Financial Administration (Law Book

Co) Structure of Accounting Theory (American

Accounting Assn) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwin) Significant Accounting Essays (Prenticeshy

Hall) International Accounting (Macmillan) Advanced Public Accounting Practice

(Irwin) The Accountability and Audit of Governshy

ments (Manchester UP) An Introduction to Corporate Accounting

Standards (American Accounting Assn) Financial Statements A Crusade for Current

Values (Pitman) A Theory of Accounting to Investors

(California UP)

62

Storey R K

Vatter W J

Wixon R et al

The Search for Accounting Prtnciples (AICPA)

The Fund Theory of Accounting (Chicago UP)

Accountants Handbook (Ronald) Inflation Accounting Report of the

Inflation Accounting Committee (HMSO)

Inflation and Taxation Report of Comshymittee of Enquiry into Inflation and Taxation May 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

413200 Accounting EnD

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting lID

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hourpaper

Selected contemporary problems in the theory and practice of managerial accounting Topics studied include the development of management accounting decision theory and information systems profit planning cost-volume profit analysis incremental analysis in~r~ company pricng and divisional performance evaluation product pncmg duect costmg allocatlon of costs cost accounting for income determmation feedback of accounting control behavioural considershyations in management accounting and general concepts of mariageshy~ent accounting including decision making for small and medium SIZed manufacturers management accounting and statistics produc-tion and operations management

Texts Articles are selected from Abacus The Accounting Review Journal of Accountmg Research Journal of Business etc Text books should not be purchased until the course has commenced

References Arney L R amp

Egginton D A Anton H R amp

Firmin P A Benston G J

Management Accounting A Conceptual Approach (Longman)

Contemporary Problems in Cost Accounting (Houghton Mifflin)

Contemporary Cost Accounting and Control (Dickenson)

63

Broom H N amp Longenecker J G

Broster E J

Chase R B amp Aquilano N J

De Coster D T amp Schafer E L

Greenwood W T

Hofstede G H

Horngren Cmiddot T

National Association of Accountants

Parker R H

Rappaport A (ed)

Schiff M amp Lewin A (ed)

Skousen K F amp Needles B E Jr(eds)

Solomons D (ed) Thomas W E (ed)

413601 Auditing

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Small Business Management 4th edn (South Western)

Management Accounting and Statistics (Longman)

Production and Operations Management (Irwin)

Management Accounting A Decision Emphases (WileyHamilton)

Decision Theory and Information Systems (South Western)

The Game of Budget Control (Ass Book Pub)

Accounting for Management Control (Prentice-Hall )

Research Reports and Research Monoshygraphs

Management Accounting An Historical Perspective (Macmillan)

Information jor Decision Making 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

Behavioural Aspects oj Accounting (Prentice-Hall)

Contemporary Thought in Accounting and Organisational Control (Dickenson)

Studies in Cost Analysis (Sweet amp Maxwell) Readings in Cost Accounting Budgeting and

Control (South Western)

Accounting IIA

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The concepts and principles Cf ~e audit func~on h~storical ~d contemporary the scope and limitations Of audIt pract1ce ~udItmg standards the law relating to cltJmpany audIts ~nd ~uditOrs mernal controls programmes and workmg papers audIt eVIdence statistIcal applications in auditing the audit of electronically processed accountshying data audit reports

64

Texts Institute of Chartered

Accountants in Australia

Fraser D F et al

Mautz R K amp Sharaf H A

Vanasse R W

References American Institute

of CPA Boutell W S Brasseaux J H amp

Edwards J D Carmichael D R amp

Willingham J J Cooper V R V Holmes A W amp

Overmyer W S Institute of Chartered

Accountants in England and Wales

Mannix E F Mautz R K Meigs W B amp

Larsen E J Ray J C (ed)

Vance L L amp Boutell W S

Willingham J J amp Carmichael D R

Statements on Auditing

Systems Based Audits - Australian Edition (Prentice-Hall )

The Philosophy of Auditing (American Accounting Assn)

Statistical Sampling for Auditing and Accounting Decisions A Simulation (McGraW-Hill)

Statement on Auditing Standards (AICPA)

Contemporary Auditing (Dickenson) Readings in Auditing (South Western)

Perspectives in Auditing (McGraw-Hill)

Manual of Auditing (Gee amp Co) Auditing Principles and Procedure (Irwin)

Statements on Auditing

Professional Negligence (Butterworths) Fundamentals of Auditing (Wiley) Principles of Auditing (Irwin)

Independent Auditing Standards (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Principles of Auditing (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Auditing Concepts and Methods (McGrawshyHill)

411300 Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Prerequisites

Hours

Introductory Quantative Methods

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

65

Examination One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

Content Components of a business computer system including levels of data common types of computer programs file concepts and introductory file organisation and processing file updating and elementary file design systems and program flowcharting and decision tables Extensive case study work in BASIC with general and comprehensive accounting applications involving system appreciation elementary system design and detailed program writing

Texts Cook G A et al Eliason A L amp

Kitts K D

References Albrecht R L et a1 Awad E M Boli M Bouten W S

Clifton H D

Dippel G amp House W C

De Rossi C J Laden H N amp

Gildersleeve T R Sanders D H

Computer Accounting Methods (Petrocelli) Business Computer Systems and Application

(Science Research Associates)

BASIC (Wiley) Business Data Processing (Prentice-Hall) Information Processing 2nd edn (SRA) Computer Oriented Business Systems

(Prentice-Hall ) Systems Analysis for Business Data

Processing (Business Books) Information Systems (Scott Foresman)

Learning BASIC Fast (Reston) System Design for Computer Applications

(Wiley) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill)

413602 Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Accounting I

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Content An examination of some of the decision making aspects of finance such as its goals and functions methods of capital budgeting cost of capital risk analysis and capital budgeting capital structure dividend policy management of current assets short and intermediate term

66

financing mer~ers and t~eovers liquidation and abandonment of a~s~ts A cnti~al evaluation of the role accountants adopt in proshyvldtng relevant tnformation for financial decisions

Texts Brigham E F et al Cases in Managerial Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Van Home J Financial Management and Policy

References Ayres F Chambers R J

Cohan B amp Wyman H E

Gordon M J

Haley C W amp Schall L D

Jean W H Jean W H

Johnson R W Lerner E M

Quirin G D Samuels J M amp

Wilkes F M Stapleton R C Weston J F

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Weston J F amp Woods D H

Wolf H A amp Richardson L

(Prentice-Hall )

Mathematics of Finance (McGraw-Hill) Accounting Finance and Management

(Butterworths) Cases in Financial Management (Prenticeshy

Hall) The Investment Financing and Valuation

of the Corporation (Irwin) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill ) Finance (Dryden) The Analytical Theory of Finance (Holt

Rinehart amp Winston) Financial Management (Allyn amp Bacon) Managerial Finance (Harcourt Brace amp

Jovanovich) The Capital Expenditure Decision (Irwin) Management of Company Finance (Nelson)

The Theory of Corporate Finance (Harrap) The Scope and Methodology of Finance

(Prentice-Hall ) Basic Financial Management Selected

Readings (Wadsworth) Theory of Business Finance Advanced

Readings (Wadsworth) Readings in Finance (Appleton-Century

Crofts)

413611 Information Systems

Note Candidates who passed the subject Account S ilifo~~bfct~anagement Studies prior to 1974nilr~~nbe a~t~f~~e~rgr~

67

McCarthy J E Montgomery D B amp

Urban G L Nador R (ed)

Scheuing E E Stanton W J Terpstra V

Westing J H amp Albaum G

Zaltman G amp Burger P C

Basic Marketing (Irwin) Management Science in Marketing

(Prentice-Hall) The Consumer and Corporate Accountability

(HarcourtJBrace) New Product Management (Dryden) Fundamentals of Marketing (McGraw-Hill) International Marketing (Holt Rinehart amp

Winston) Modern Marketing Thought (Macmillan)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

413901 Measurement Systems

Corequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Accounting IlIA

1 lecture hour and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Symbolic logic set theory and applications to accounting Groups fields and the measurement scales axiomatic foundations of historic cost accounting (ljiri and Mattessich) price level adjusted systems replacement cost and real replacement cost measurement (Edwards and Bell) market vruue systems linear programming and optimizshyation of financial position

Texts

References Chambers R J

Copi I Edwards E O amp

Bell P W Ijiri Y

Mattessich R

Sterling R R

Nil

Accounting Evaluation and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Logic (Macmillan) The Theory and Measurement of Business

Income (California UP) The Foundations of Accounting

Measurelent (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods

(Irwin) Theory of the Measurement of Enterprise

Income (Kansas UP)

70

412600 Organisational Behaviour

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

Two 2-hour papers (Terms 1 and 2) One 3-hour paper (Final)

Theories and research results relevant to problems of administration from the behavioural sciences viewpoint Topics include behavioural models values and attitudes learning perception motivation creativity problem~olving communications group dynamics and leadership These are treated in relation to the cla_ssical managerial functions and the management of specialised functional areas such as personnel marketing production and finance

Texts Leavitt H J amp

Pondy L R Luthans F

References Gellerman S W

Leavitt H J Miner J B Pugh D S Schein E H Sutermeister R Tannenbaum A S

Readings in Managerial Psychology 2nd edn (Chicago UP)

Organisational Behaviour (McGraw-Hill)

The Management of Human Relations (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Managerial Psychology (Ohicago UP) Management Theory (Macmillan) Writers on Organisations (Penguin) Orgaflisational Psychology (Prentice-Hall) People and Productivity (McGraw-Hill) Social Psychology of the Work Organisation

(Wadsworth)

412601 Quantitative Business Analysis II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods

2 lecture hours per week

One 2-hour paper progressive assessment and project

Quantitative methodology BASIC programming mathematics review decision theory demography and its applications CPMjPERT inventory modelling linear programming in practice game theory

71

Markov analysis queueing theory dynamic programming business forecasting elements of simulation management of quantitative analysis projects in real life

Texts Anderson J et al Levin R I amp

Kirkpatrick C A Pollard A H et al Starr M K amp

Stein I

References Baumol W J

Hillier F S amp Lieberman G J

Taha H A

Wagner H M

Thesis and Assignment Writing (Wiley) Quantitative Approaches to Management

3rd edn (McGraw-Hill) Demographic Techniques (Pergamon) The Practice of Management Science

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Theory and Operations Analysis (Prentice-Hall)

Introduction to Operations Research (Holden Day)

Operations Research An Introduction (Macmillan)

Principles of Operations Research 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall )

413607 Securities Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Returns and risks associated with securities investment the structure and regulation of capital markets financial statement analysis stock price valuation models the efficient market hypothesis portfolio theory the capital asset pricing model investment management performance evaluation option pricing

Texts Lorie J H amp

Hamilton M T Twark A J et al

References Amling F Brealey R A

The Stock Market Theories and Evidence (Irwin)

Security Analysis and Portfolio Manageshyment A Casebook (Holden Day)

Investments (Prentice-Hall) An Introduction to Risk and Return from

Common Stocks (MIT Press)

72

Brealey R A

Edwards R D amp Magee J

Elton E J amp Gruber M J

Fama E F amp Miller M H

Francis J C

Graham B et al Hirst R R amp

Wallace R H Lev B

Lorie J H amp Brealey R A

Sharpe W F

413609 Taxation

Prerequisites

Hours

Security Prices in a Competitive Market More About Risk and Return from Common Stocks (MIT Press)

Technical Analysis of Stock Trends (Magee)

Security Evaluation and Portfolio Manageshyment (Prentice-Hall)

The Theory of Finance (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Investments Analysis and Management (McGraw-Hill)

Security Analysis (McGraw-Hill) Studies in the Australian Capital Market

(Cheshire) Financial Statement Analysis (Prenticeshy

Hall) Modern Developments in Investment

Management (Praeger) Portfolio Theory and Capital Markets

(McGraw-Hill )

Accounting I

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination Two 3-hour papers Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to in the Reading Guide into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content Income tax law and practice the Income Tax Assessment Act the calculation of taxable income and of tax payable in respect of different classes of taxpayer rebates of tax collection of income tax assessments objections and appeals sales tax assessment and collection payroll tax

Texts Mannix E F amp

Harris D W OR CCH

Australian Income Tax Guide (latest edn) (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Accountancy Exercises (University of

Newcastle)

73

Statutes

OR CCH

References Mannix E F

Ryan K W

Statutes

Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Australian Income Tax Assessment Act 1936-1976

Australian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

Manual of the Law of Income Tax in Australia 3rd edn (Law Book Co)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act 1953 (as amended) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Sales Tax Assessment Acts Nos 1 to 9 (Aust Govt Printing Service)

Income Tax (Non-residents Dividends and Interest Act) (Aust Govt Printing Service)

413612 Theories of Organisation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organisational Behaviour

2 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

The influence of politics power and conflict topics include organisshyations and the rationalisation of work organisational structures bureaucracies as working communities the scientific management movement Mayo and the Hawthorne experiments Kurt Lewin and field theory group membership and intergroup conflict search for principles of management worker participation models organisationshyal development and propositions of organisational behaviour

Texts Lupton T

Poole M

Sofer C

Management and the Social Sciences (Penguin)

Worker Participation in Industry (Routledge amp Kegan Paul)

Organisations in Theory and Practice (Heinemann)

74

OR Mouzelis N P

References Argyle M

Brown W Kast F amp

Rosenzweig J E Katz D amp

Kahn R L Kerr C et al Klein L

March J G amp Simon H A

Margulies N amp Raid A P

Silverman D Woodward J

Organisation and Bureaucracy - An Analysis of Modern Theories (Routledge amp Kegan hul)

The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour (Penguin)

Organisations (Heinemann) Organisation and Management A Systems

Approach (McGraw-Hill) The Social Psychology of Organisations

(Wiley) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Peijcan) New Forms of Work Organization

(Tavistock) Organisations (Wiley)

Organisation Development Values Process and Technology (McGraw-Hill)

The Theory of Organisations (Heinemann) Industrial Organisation Theory and Practice

(Oxford VP)

412300 Accounting Seminar I (Additional work required for honours degree in Accounting)

Note This subject is taken in Year II of the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Each student is required to undertake research into particular aspects of accounting to be chosen from for example valuation problems in accounting depreciation variable costing of company financial statements and to present his findings in the form of a research essay

Texts Nil (but each student will be referred to material relevant to his research)

75

413300 Accounting Seminar II (Ad~itional work required for honoufs degree n Accountmg)

~~esUbjeot is taken in Year III ltof the full-time honours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-hme stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

2 seminar hours per week

Assessment of seminar paper

Content The theory and measurement of accounting profit

Texts

References Backer M (ed) Baxter W T amp

Davidson S (eds) Bedford N M

Chambers R J et aI

Davidson S et al

Edwards E O amp llell P W

Gamer P amp Berg K B

Gilman S Goldberg L

Hansen P

Hendriksen E S Johnston T R et al

Norris H Parker R H amp

Harcourt G C (eds)

Paton W A amp Littleton A C

Nil

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Studies in Accounting Theory (Sweet amp

Maxwell) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (Addlson-Wesley)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshire)

An Income Approach to Accounting Theory ( Prentice-Hall )

The Theory and Measurement of Business Income (California VP)

Readings in Accounting Theory (Houghton Mifflin)

Accounting Concepts of Profit (Ronald) An Inquiry into the Nlfture of Accountmg

(American Accountmg Assn) The Accounting Concept of Profit

(North Holland) Accounting Theory (Irwin) The Law and Practice of Company

Accounting in Australia (Butterworths) Accounting Theory (Pitman) Readings in The Concept and Measurement

of Income (Cambridge UP)

An Introduction to Corporate Accounting Standards (Amer Accounting Assn)

76

Sands J E

Sterling R R

Zeff S A amp Keller T F (eds)

Wealth Income and Intangibles (Toronto UP)

Theory oj the Measurement of Enterprise Income (Kansas UP)

Financial Accounting Theory I Issues and Controversies (McGraw-Hill)

414100 Accounting IV

Note This subject is taken in Year IV of the full-time honlaquours degree in Accounting (or equivalent part-time stages)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

See The Honours Degree - Accounting page 17

6-8 hours per week

Not less than four 3-hour papers

(1) Analytical studies and supervised independent research in advanced financial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems eg Accountshying IlIA or Accounting IIIB (whichever not taken previously) methodology of accounting theory formation contemporary accounting thought measurement systems international comshyparisons of accounting methods and theories

(2) Research Essay

Note The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term of the final year

Text Mueller G G

References American Accounting

Association American Institute of

Certified Public Accountants

Backer M (ed) Bedford N M

International Accounting (Macmillan)

A Statement oj Basic Accounting Theory

Professional Accounting in 30 Countries

Modern Accounting Theory (Prentice-Hall) Income Determination Theory An

Accounting Framework (AddisonshyWesley)

77

Berg K B et at

Chambers R J

Chambers R J et a1

Deinzer H T

Goldberg L

Hendriksen E S Ijm Y

Mattessich R Moonitz M amp

Littleton A C Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Mueller G G

Pattilo J W

Price Waterhouse International

Robock S H amp Simmonds K

Scott D R

Sterling R R amp Bentz W F

Stone W E (ed)

Readings in lnte~tional Accounting (Houghton Miffhn)

Accounting Evaluat~on and Economic Behaviour (Prentice-Hall)

The Accounting Frontier (Cheshue)

Development of Accoun~ing Thought (Holt Rinehart amp WInston)

h N t of Accountmg An InqUlry mto tea ure (Amer Accounting ~sn)

Accounting Theory (lrwm) The Foundation of Accounting Manage-

ment (Prentice-Hall) Accounting and Analytical Methods (Irwm) Significant Accounting Essays (PrentIce-

H~) d Accounting Practices in the Netherlan s

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Germany

(Washington UP) Accounting Practices in Sweden

(Washington UP) The Foundation of Financial Accountmg

(Louisiana State UP ~ S Y of Accounting Prmclples and U1~porting Practices in 38 Count~les

(lnst of Chartered Accountants m England and Wales)

International Busin~ss and MultmatlOnal Enterprises (Irwm)

The Cultural Significance of Accounts (Lucas) )

Perspective (South-Western Accountmg m

Foundations of Accounting Theory (Florida UP)

Fmiddot bull aI Studies 416104 Accounting and manCl

Note restricted to students who have not previously Enrolment In thlS sub~~tnations at tertiary level passed any accountmg e

Prerequisites Nil 78

l I I

I

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content The use of accounting information for business decisions Analysis of balance sheets Income appropriation and flow of funds statements basic accounting procedures the concept of cost types and uses of internal accounting systems cost allocation the concept of income inventory valuation measurement and accounting accounting for inflation preparation of financial statements analysis and interpreshytation of financial statements Basic cost accounting management control processes budget as a planning device budget as a control device budgeting and employee behaviour responsibility accounting performance evaluation cost analysis for management decisions including capital acquisitions and optimal investment behaviour transfer pricing capacity utilisation and control statistical techniques for operational cost controL

Texts

Gordon M J amp Shillinglaw G

References

Accounting A Management Approach (Irwin)

To be advised

410112 Advanced Financial Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Financial Management (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The course is designed to study in depth problem areas in financial management Topics covered will include capital budgeting under uncertainty and capital rationing capital structure dividend policy mergers and acquisitions divestiture adequacy of published financial statements portfolio management and the application of computers to investment management Case studies will be used extensively

Texts

References Archer S H amp

D Ambrosio C A (eds)

Nil

The Theory of Business Finance A Book of Readings (Macmillan)

79

Bierman H Burton J C (ed)

Butters J K Chen H D (ed) Haley C W amp

Schall L D Lew Melnyk Z amp

Bathgrover C L Serraino W J

et al The Institute of

Chartered Financial Analysts

Weston F J amp Woods D H

Financial Policy Decisions (Macmillan) Corporate Financial Reporting Conflicts

and Challenge (AICPA) Case Problems in Finance (Irwin) Frontiers of Managerial Finance (Gulf) The Theory of Financial Decisions

(McGraw-Hill) Cases in Business Finance (Irwin)

Frontiers of Financial Management (SouthshyWestem)

CFA Readings in Financial Analysis (Irwin)

Theory of Business Finance Advanced Readings (Wadsworth)

410122 Advanced Taxation Taxation (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination Students will be permitted to take copies of the Statutes referred to below into the annual examination provided the copies are not marked otherwise than by underlining

Content The history of income tax in Australia An intensive study of income tax law and practice as it applies to individuals partnerships comshypanies trusts and superannuation funds including the study of selectshyed Board of Review decisions and judgments of the Courts intershynational tax agreements case studies in tax planning the taxation of capital gains other income wealth expenditure taxes tax reform

Texts Mannix E F

Mannix E F amp Harris D W

OR CCH Ryan K W

A ustralian Income Tax Leading Cases (Butterworths)

A ustralian Income Tax Guide (Butterworths)

1977 Australian Master Tax Guide Manual of the Law of Income Tax in

Australia (Law Book Co)

80

Statutes

References Adams P R Bock F C amp

Mannix E F

CCH CCH

Hardingham I J amp Baxt R

Knight E S et al

Sweeney C A amp Telfer J H

Income Ta~ Assessment Act 1936-1975 (Austrahart Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax (International Agreements) Act1953 as amended (Australian Govt Publishing Service)

Income Tax ~e~ulations (Australian Govt Pubhshmg Service)

Australian Tax Planning (Butterworth ) Australian Income Tax Law and Practi~e

(~utterwo~ths) and Butterworths TaxshyattOn SerVlce

Australian Federal Tax Reporter The MathegtVs Report and the Taxation of

Companzes Discretionary Trusts (Butterworths)

Superannuation Planning in Australia (ecH)

Revenue Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Report Cf Committee of Enquiry into In~la~lOn and Taxation (Australian Govt Pnntmg Service)

Taxation Review Committee Full Report 19~5 (Aus~rahan Govt Printing Service)

Taxatlon Revlew Committee Commissioned Studles (Australian Govt Printing Service)

410114 B ha rat e VlOU and Social Framework in Business

Prerequisites O rgamsatIOnal Behaviour (Advisory)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Examination An examination each half year

Content Behavioural Framework in Business Th relevant to management probl f eones and research results standpoint Topics include man~~ r~~ th~ behavioural science leaming perception erson rmiddot en uacbons values attitudes solving introduction toP com Ityen tnotlvatton creativity problem-umca Ions group dynamics leadership

81

and related socio~psychological topics Some emphasis on professional development in management Social Framework in Business The cultural growth and social value structure of western society The relationship between organisations and the environment The process of organisational change The various theories of organisation structures viz open systems structural functionalism socio~technical Glacier model etc Lewins force field theory models of organisational conflict

Texts Brown W Kelly J Pugh D S (ed) Yuill B amp

Steinhoff D

References

Organisation (Heinemann) Organisational Behaviour (Irwin) Organization Theory (Penguin) Developing Managers in Organisations

(Wiley)

To be advised

410103 Commercial programming

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial EDP (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week for 1 st half year plus readings and extensive practical work for 2nd half year

Part A _ Two 3~hour papers (i) Theqry at midyear Part B _ One 3-hour paper (ii) Cobol at end of year

Part A - Cobol Basic concepts of file handling and file maintenance including file

creation and processing Flow charting file merging and updating of transactions tape block-

ing and buffering General run types including editing searching and sorting Direct access versus serial random or sequential organisation Rerun techniques verifying programme accuracy table lookup programme documentation and use of test data COBOL as a business data processing and file organisation language Extensive practical work in COBOL including case studies

82

TPahrt B - Social Implications of Computers

e spectrum of political I Imiddot and socal issues huma~ J~blmanagen~l philCsophical ethical change tmpact upon organisation ses assoc~ated WIth strategies of effects upon communication tructure~ ScI-technical systems

pnvacy publIc JustIfication

Texts ICL Feingold C

References Clifton H D

Davis G B amp Litecky C R

DeRossi C J Kapur G K

Laden H N amp Gildersleeve T R

McCracken D D et al

Murach M Sanders D H Sprowls R C Stem N B amp R A Watters J L

1900 Series COBOL Manual FunCwdamcentals of COBOL Programming

Brown)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processmg (Business Books)

EI~)tary Cobol Programming (McGraw-

Learning COBOL Fast (Reston) Programming in Standard COBOL

(SRA) Sys(~ile~)sign for Computer Applications

Programming Business Computers (Wiley)

Standard COBOL (SRA) Computers in Business (McGraw-Hill) Computing with COBOL (Harper amp Row) Cobol Programming (Wiley) Cobol Programming (Heinemann)

410106 Corporate Strategy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Organizational Behaviour (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An integrating course with a Includes evaluation determinatf~~er~ managem

ent point of view

atIon of policies of the bu n Iffiplementauon and administr-

st dmiddot d Sl ess enterpnse The c il u les an a computerized busm ] ourse ut Izes case ess po ICY game

83

Texts Cotter R V

Newman W H amp Logan J P

References Ackoff R L

Ansoff H J Argenti J Broom H M

Christensen C R et al

Hutchinson J G

Katz R L

The Business Policy Game (AppletonshyCentury-Crofts)

Strategy Policy and Central Management (South-Western)

A Concept of Corporate Planning (Wiley-Interscience)

Corporate Strategy (McGraw-Hill Corporate Planning (Allen amp Unwm) Business Policy and Strategic Action

(Prentice-Hall ) Business Policy Text and Cases (Irwin)

Readings in Management Strategy and Tactics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Cases and Concepts in Corporate Strategy ( Prentice-Hall)

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

See Departmetllt of Legal Studies page 129

410115 Marketing Management

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Marketing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

Progressive assessment plus paper at end of year

Content h int M k tng Management Analysis of marketmg from t e v1ewpo

f a~h I decision-maker including study of the marketmg con~ept ~arket research mark~t segmentation product ~evelOPdment pr~~

channels of distribution personal sellmg an promo 10 ~~~lreration will also be given to how these topics are a~e~~ed t~~ ~~~n~~l~wn~ir~~~~~~~~softr~s struct~~ens~~efeg~f~~~~tnrlnts Texts Kotler P

Zaltman G amp Burger P

Marketing Management - Analysis Planshyning and Control (Prentice-Hall)

Marketing Research Fundamentals and Dynamics (Dryden)

84

References To be advised

430104 Political and Legal Institutions See Department of Legal Studies page 131

410104 Systems Analysis and Design

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Commercial Electronic Data Processing (Advisory)

2 lecture hours per week

An examination each half year

Systems Analysis and Design A The lectures and case studies are concerned with the analysis and documentation of typical computershybased systems eg An order processing stock recording and invoicshying system Topics covered include the role of the systems analyst fact finding recording and analysis documentation and standards data capture and conversion communication with users Systems Analysis and Design B This subject is a development of the Systems Analysis and Design A with the inclusion of the following topics data transmission real time systems information retrieval file processing form design management and the computer file design systems design and determination operating systems multishyprogramming

Texts

Wohl G amp D Angelico M

References Chandor A et al

Clifton H D

Daniels A amp Yeates D

Glans T B et al

The National Computing Centre Systems Analysis and Design Student Notes will be supplied Case Studies of Business Data Processing

Systems (Irwin)

Practical Systems Analysis (Rupert Hart amp Davis)

Systems Analysis for Business Data Processing (Wiley)

Basic Training in Systems Analysis (Pitman)

Management Systems (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

85

Hare Van Court

Optner S L

Orilia L et al Weiss E A

Systems Analysis A Diagnostic Approach (Harcourt Brace amp World)

Systems Analysis for Business Management (Prentice-Hall)

Business Data Processing Systems (Wiley) Computer UsageApplications (McGrawshy

Hill)

410110 Research Essay

Prerequisites Nil

Content Students are expected to attend a course in ~esearch Methodology which will be offered for 1 hour per week durmg Term 1 The Research Essay (one copy only) should normally be submitted by the first day of the third term

Texts Berenson C amp

Colton R Rigby P H

Reference Strunk W amp

White E B

Research and Report Writing for Business and Economics (Random House)

Conceptual Foundations of Business Research (Wiley)

The Elements of Style (Macmillan)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

421100 Economics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content Introduces the basic economic problem (the problem of scarCIty) and reviews the relevance of the main areas of economic study to thIS problem Theories and aspects of such topics as employment economic allocation the distribution of inco~e and growth and development are broadly reviewed in the begmnmg to provlde a background for later studies While elementary macroeconomIC

86

concepts and theories are introduced at various points in this course the course principally concentrates on microeconomics but in a way which integrates it with other areas of economics Following the introductory review the course concentrates on the theory of individual and market demand There is also some disshycussion of macroeconomic concepts of demand Concepts of supply and of market equilibrium are introduced and the macroeconomic Keynesian analogue to Marshallian market eqUilibrium is discussed After an analysis of -the production function and costs of production the cou~se exa~in~s various types of m~r~et competition and their economIC ImplIcatIOns Perfect competltion monopoly oligopoly nd ltther types of imperfect competition are considered Attention IS paId to the results of both theoretical and empirical studies A sectin then follows analysing the pricing and employment of proshyductlve servIces and some macroeconomic extensions of distribution theory are considered A concluding section of the course deals with various aspects of economic welfare Throughout the course special attention will be given to the institutshyional context in which economic decisions are made

Background Reading Heyne P

Lipsey R Samuelson P et al

Texts Tisdell C

The Economic Way of Thinking (Science Research Associates)

Positive Economics 2nd edn (Weidenfeld) Economics 2nd AustralIan edn (McGrawshy

Hill)

Economics of Markets An Introduction to Economic Analysis (Wiley 1974)

Workbook to Accompany the Economics of Markets (Wiley 1975)

and one of the Cole C L

following -

Hirshleifer J

Leftwich R H

Mansfield E

Microeconomics - A Contemporary Approach (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973)

Price Theory and Applications (Pre01iceshyHall 1976)

The Price System and Resource Allocation 6th edn (Holt Rinehart 1976)

Microeconomics Theory and Application 2nd edn (Norton 1975)

Notes will be distributed on topics not covered by the above texts

References To be advised

87

421107 Introductory Quautitative Methods (Replaces Economic Statistics I)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3 hours of lectures and tutorials per week in small groups

One final 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

This course is an introductory course aimed at giving studelllts an understanding of basic quantitative methods used in economics and business The course covers three broad areas elemen1tary statistics mathematical techniques in economics and elementary computing Elementary Statistics Topics covered include probability measures of central tendency and dispersion introductory s~mpling and s~pshyling distributions hypothesis testing linear regression and correlatlOn analysis time series analysis and index numbers Mathematical Techniques Topics covered include the use ~f functions in economics elementary calculus and matnces m economics and Mathematics of Finance Elementary Computing Stude~ts will be taugh~ ~ASIC programshyming and how to use the Faculty s computmg facilIties

Preliminary Reading

Moroney M J

Yeomans K A

Texts James D E amp

Throsby C D Newton B L

References

Kazmier L G

Neter J et al

PoUard A H

Shao S P

Facts from Figures (Penguin) Introductory Statistics Statistics for the

Social Scientist Vol 1 (Penguin)

Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley 1973)

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Statistical Analysis in Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

Fundamental Statistics for Business and Economics 4th edn (Allyn amp Bacon 1973)

An Introduction to the Mathematics of Finance (Pergamon 1968)

Statistics for Business and Economics (Merrill)

88

Whitmore G A et al Self-Correcting Problems in Statistics (Allyn amp Bacon 1970)

Yamane T Statistics - An Introductory Analysis (Harper)

421105 Economic History I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 leoture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Assessment by major essays tutorial papers and an end-of-year examination

Economic development in history a comparative approach Major case studies include West Africa China and Western Europe before and after the Industrial Revolution

Preliminary Reading

Cipolla C M

Gill R T

Texts

Davis R

Hughes J E T

LandesD (ed)

North D C amp Thomas R P

References

Cipolla C M (ed)

Cohen B J

Elvin M

Hopkins A G

The Economic History of World Population 5th edn (Penguin 1970)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

The Rise of the A tlantic Economies (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1973)

Industrialisation and Economic History (McGraw-Hill 1970)

The Rise of Capitalism (Collier-Macmillan 1966)

The Rise of the Western World (Cambridge UP 1973)

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols I-III (1972-74)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan 1974)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Methuen 1973)

An Economic History of West Africa (Longmans 1973)

89

Kenwood A G amp Lougheed A L

Malthias P

Robertson R M

Rostow W W Supple B E (ed)

Y oungson A J (ed)

The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960 (Allen amp Vnwin 1971)

The First Industrial Nation (Scribners 1969)

History of the American Economy 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace 1973)

How It All Began (Methuen 1974) The Experience of Economic Growth

(Random House 1963) Economic Development in the Long Run

(Allen amp Vnwin 1972)

422108 Economic History II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History I or Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour and one 2-hour paper

The major economic changes that occurred in Europe in the nin~shyteenth century their background in the eight~nt~ cenh1ry and theIr outcome in the twentieth century EconomIC mteraotlOn and the rippling effects of economic change at both the international and te interseotoral levels will be a major theme of the course Whtle special attention is given to case studies in Britain France Germany and Russia other countries win be introduced for purposes of comparison

Texts Cipolla C M (ed)

Deane P

References Crouret F ( ed )

Deane P amp Cole W A

Gerschenkron A

Landes 0 S

Fontana Economic History of Europe Vols III amp IV (1973)

The First Industrial Revolution (Cambridge VP 1967)

Essays in European Economic History (Arnold 1969)

British Economic Growth 1688-1959 (Cambridge VP 1964)

Economic Backwardness in Historical Perspective (Harvard VP 1969)

The Unbound Prometheus (Cambridge VP 1969)

90

Maddison A

Maddison A

Milward A amp Saul S B

Pollard S amp Holmes C

Rostow W W (ed)

Economic Growth in Japan and the USSR (Norton 1969)

Economic Growth in the West (Norton 1964)

The Economic Development of Continental Europe 1780-1870 (Allen amp Vnwin 1973)

Documents in European Economic History 3 vols (Arnold 1968 1972 1973)

The Economics of the Take-off into Sustainshyed Growth (Macmillan 1968)

423106 Economic History III

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic History II or Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

End of year examination and progressive assessment

Comparative economic history of Japan China and Indonesia from the perspectives of the size and distribution of economic surplus the evolution of the market economy the growth of cities technological and organisational dualism and the role of government and private entrepreneurship

References

Allen G C

Day C

Elvin M

Feuerwerker A

Geertz C Geertz C

Hall J W amp Jansen M B

Hou C M

A Short Economic History of Modern Japan 3rd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1972)

The Dutch in Java reprint (Oxford UP 1972)

The Pattern of the Chinese Past (Eyre Methuen 1973)

Chinas Early Industrialization (Harvard VP 1958)

Peddlers and Princes (Chicago VP 1963) Agricultural Involution (California VP

1966) Studies in the Institutional History of Early

(eds) Modern Japan (Princeton UP 1968) Foreign Investment and Economic Developshy

ment in China 1840-1937 (Harvard UP 1965)

91

Lockwood W W

Ohkawa K amp Rosovsky H

Perkins D H (ed)

Smith T C

422203 Economics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

The Economic Development of Japan 2nd edn (Princeton UP 1968)

Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford UP 1973)

Chinas Modern EconolJlY in Historical lerspective (Stanford VP 1975)

The Agricultural Origins of Modern Japan (Stanford UP 1958)

Economics I

3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The elementary macroeconomic ~oncepts intrduced in EconOIpics I are developed into a comprehenSive exammatlon of ~e deteI1llmants of aggregate economic activity The microeconomlc foundation of macroeconomic analysis is examined and the concept of general equilibrium is introduced Conventional static models of econ~mic activity including both product a~d m~netary ~arkets are e~aJme~ from the Keynesian and Monetanst I0mts of VlW DynlIlllC ~mphshycations are introduced and extended mto a prehmmary diSCUSSion of the nature and causes of economic Huctuadons and grow~ Empha~is is given to the welfare implications of macroec~nomlc analYSIS particularly in relation to policy goals associated With levels of emshyployment price stability and economic growth Refeence IS made to externalities associated with macroecon~mlc polICy meastres particularly as they affect the non-economlc wel~are f society Special attention is given to the institutional context m which macroshyeconomic decisions are made and the role of the government and international sectors

Texts Nevile J W

Wonnacott P

References Barrett N S

Bowers D A amp Baird R N

Fiscal Policy in Australia - Theory and Practice (Cheshire 1970)

Macroeconomics (Irwin 1974)

The Theory of Macroenconomic Policy (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Elementary Mathematical Macroeconomics (Prentice-Hall 1971)

92

Keiser N F (ed)

Keynes J M

Mueller M G (ed)

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Readings in Macroeconomics Theory Evidence and Policy (Prentice-Hall 1970)

General Theory of Employment Interest and Money (Macmillan)

Readings in Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1971)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robinson 1975)

422109 Economics Honours Seminar I

PrerequiSites

Corequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

Economics II

1 seminar hour per week

One 3~hour paper

Designed for potential honours graduates it involves in depth treatshyment and or extension of topics treated in the Economics II course

422107 n40ney and Banking

Prerequisites

Hours

ExamilUltion

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Major aspects of monetary theory pol~cy and inamptitutions Topics the demand for money the relatIo~shlp of the eal an~ monetary secto of the ~onomy the economiCs of domestic bankmg central bankDg techD19ue~ o~ m~netary control supply of money analysis bankmg finanCial mstltutIons and monetary policy in Australia and other selected economies international aspects of money banking and finance

Text Wrightsman D

References Bain A D

Introduction to Monetary Theory and Policy 2nd edn (Free 1976)

The Control of the Money Supply (Penguin 1970)

93

Harris C P

Smith W L amp Teiger R L (eds)

The Ecbrwmics of the Financial Sector 2nd edn (Cheshire 1975)

Readings in Money Nationallncoe and Stabilisation Policy 3rd edn (Irwm 1974)

422105 Economic Statistics II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics lIB Topic H

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3hour paper

Content Statistical application is emphasised rather th~n thery and tOpiCS include probability random variables ~nd then dtstn~ution ~ampshyling classical hypqtbesis (testing and esttmatlon analysts of vananc~ regression analysis Bayesian decisIOn theory ad ~o~-parametf1c techniques A short course o~ BASIC progr~~~mg IS mcluded and students make extensive use of computer facibties

Text Hamburg M

References Costis H G Freund J E amp

Williams F J Lapin L L

Spiegel M R

Statistical Analysis for Decision Making Internal edn (Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich)

Statistics for Business (Merrill 1972) Elementary Business Statistics The Mod~rn

Approach 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1972) Statistics for Modern Business Decisions

(Harcourt Brace amp Jovanovich 1973) Theory and Problems of Stati~tics Schaum

Outline Series (McGraw-Hill)

422106 Statistical Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Introductory Quantitative Methods or Mathematics 1m Topic H

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) Mathematical Statistics (ii) General Linear Regression Model (iii) InputQutput Analysis

94

Preliminary Reading Newton B L

Texts Chiou-Shuang Y~n

Kmenta Jan

References Frank C R Jnr

Johnston J

Mood A M amp Graybill F A

Statistics for Business (SRA 1973)

Introduction to Input-Output Analysis (Rinehart amp Winston)

Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan 1971)

Statistics and Ecorwmetrics (Holt Rinehart amp Winston)

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Introduction to the Theory of Statistics (McGraw-Hill )

422201 Industry Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and prog~ssive assessment

The study of industrial structure and organisation with particular reference to Australian industry The subjects include the large corporation in modem industry including time and the value of the firm risk and the value of the firm imperfect information the modem industrial firm integration diversification and merger research and technology change the structure and performance of industry including the organisation of industry entry and the growth of firms and oligopoly pricing and marketing ~he regulation of monopoly and controlling the performance of industry including laws designed to promote competition competitive market failure second best price and output and the regulated monopoly firm

Text Devine P J et al

References Aaronovitch S amp

Sawyer M

An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmics (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

Big Business (Macmillan 1975)

95

Cohen K J amp Cyert R M

George K D

Gilbert M (ed)

Koch J V

Mansfield E (ed)

Needham D

Needham D (ed)

Pickering J

Soherer F M

Sheridan K

Sherman R

Vernon J M

Yamey B (ed)

Theory of the Firm 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1975)

lndustrial Organization 2nd edn (Allen amp Unwin 1974)

The Modern Business Enterprise (Penguin 1972)

lndustrial Organization and Prices (PrenticeshyHall 1974)

Monopoly Power and Economic Performshyance 3rd edn (Norton 1974)

Economic Analysis and Industrial Structure (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1969)

Readings in the Economics of Industrial Organization (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970)

lndustrial Structure and Market Conduct (Martin Robertson 1974)

lndustrial Market Structure and Economic Performance (Rand McNally 1971)

The Firm in Australia (Thomas Nelson 1974)

The Economics of Industry (Little Brown 1974)

Market Structure and Industrial Performshyance A Review of Statistical Findings (Allyn amp Bacon 1972)

Economics of Industrial Structure Selected Readings (Penguin 1973)

4ZZ20Z Labour Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper and progressive assessment

The economic significance of labour as a factor of production Areas include the supply of labour the nature and operations of labour markets and labour market policy the determination of wage rates and wage structures theoretical approaches to the question of income distribution wage criteria and wage fixation in the conteXlt of arbitshyration inflation and the wage-prioe issue prices and income policies

96

Preliminary Reading Portus J H

Texts

Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-1970 (Hicks Smith 1971)

Hom R V Labour Market Economics - Australia (Cbeshire 1975)

Niland J R amp Australian Labour Economics Readings Isaac J E (eds) new edn (Sun Books 1975)

McConnell C R (ed) Perspectives on Wage Determination A Book of Readings (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Reynolds L G Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th

References Cartter A M amp

Marshall F R

Davidson P

Jones A

Marshall R amp Perlman R ( eds )

Perlman R Rees A

Reynolds L G et al

edn (Prentioe Hall 1974)

Labour Economics Wages Employment and Trade Unionism rev edn (Irwin 1972)

Theories of Aggregate Income Distribution (Rutgers UP 1960)

The New Inflation The Politics of Prices and Incomes (Penguin 1973)

An Anthology of Labor Economics Readshyings and Commentary (Wiley 1972)

Labor Theory (Wiley 1969) The Economics of Work and Pay (Harper

amp Row 1973) Readings in Labor Economics and Labor

Relations (Prentice-Hall 1974) Taylor G W amp New Concepts in Wage Determination

Pierson F C (eds) (McGraw-Hill 1957) Whitehead D Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia

(Longman 1973) Wage Determination Papers presented at

an International Conference Paris 3-6 July 1973 (OECD 1974)

422206 Comparative Economic Systems

PrereqUisites Economics I

Hours 3 lecture hours per week

Examination One 3hour paper and progressive assessment

97

Content

A one-year course which compares theoretical economic systems and the actual economic systems of selected countries A pant of the course deals with capitalists and socialist economic systems and t~eir varian ts and examines the convergence theory The theoretical conceptions of various eCOlomists about the operation of aternative economic systems are scrutmlSed The cour~e g~es on to dlSCUS~ t~e eXitent to whioh the types of systems operatmg m advanced soclahst and capitalist societies are relevant to less ~eveloped cltuntries and the way in which some less developed countnes are evolvmg different systems

The choice of an ideal economic system involves normative consider~ ations to some extent and raises questions which are now discussed by some economists under the heading of Political Economy

References

Baran P amp Sweezy P M

Cohen B J

Friedman M

Galbraith J K

Galbraith J K

Grossman G

Lange O amp Taylor F M

Meier G M

Mermelstein D

Nove A amp Nuti D (eds)

Papandreou A G

Prybyla J S

Sohumpeter J A

Monopoly Capital (Penguin ] 966)

The Question of Imperialism (Macmillan ]974)

Capitalism and Freedom (Chicago UP 1962)

The New Industrial State (Hamish Hamilton 1967)

The Underdeveloped Country (Canadian Broadcasting Commission 1967)

Economic Systems 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1974)

On The Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw-Hill 1937 1964)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edri (1970)

Economics Mainstream Readings and Radical Critiques 2nd edn (Random House 1973)

Socialist Economics (Penguin ] 972)

Paternalistic Capitalism (Minnesota UP 1972)

Comparative Economic Systems (Appleton 1969)

Capitalism Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1943 1965)

98

Seers D

Siedman Ann

Tinbergen J

Wheelwright E L amp McFarlane B

The Limitations of the Special Case Bulletin of the Oxford University Institute of Statistics Vol 25 (1963)

Comparative Development Strategies in East Africa (East Africa Publishing House 1972)

Do Communist and Free Economies Show a Converging Pattern Soviet Studies (April 1961) pp 333-341

The Chinese Road to Socialism (Monthly Review Press ] 970)

422110 Industrial Relations II

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

One of Economics I Economic History I or Legal Studies I Additionally students are advised to read in Labour Economics and Organisational Behaviour prior to or con~ current with Industrial Relations II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper plus assignments

The purpose of this course is to provide students with an introduction to industrial relatioIis concepts and tools of analysis in the context of Australian industrial relations Ipe approach taken in the subject is intended to highlight the intershydisclplmary nature of the study of industrial relations The course opens with an introductory segment It then turns to cons~der a number of main themes within each of which a variety of specific iSsues and problems are examined fhe llain themes considered are man in industrial society trade uruorusm an~ the labour movement employers associations the processes of Job regulations conflict in industry

Preliminary Reading Child J Martin R M Portus J H

TextsReferences Blackburn R (ed) Bums T (ed)

Unionism and the Labour Movement Trade Unions in Australia Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970

Ideology in Social Science Industrial Man

99

Flanders A (ed) Fox A Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Mills C P amp

Sorrell J Parker S R et al Sykes E J amp

Glasbeek H J Wedderburn K W

Collective Bargaining A Sociology of Work in Industry Strikes Australian Labour Relations Readings

(2nd edn) Federal Industrial Law (latest edn)

The Sociology of Industry Labour Law in Australia

The Worker and the Law (2nd edn)

423104 Growth and Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Economics II

3 lecture hours per week

Two 3-hour papers (i) at the end of the first half of the academic year and (ii ) in the end of the academic year examination period

Content The first half of this course will deal with the dynamics of fiuctuations and growth in the framework of an advanced economy A critical appraisal is undertaken of leading contributions in this field Topics such as the produotion function technical progress and various models of growth are dea1t with in detail The second half of the course will study underdeveloped countries with specific focus upon their dualistic nature The structure of the rural and urban economies of the typical underdeveloped country will be investigated in order to understand underdevelopment and hence design development strategies Theoretical models will be suppleshymented with case studies from Asia throughout this half of the course

(i) Growth

Text Hamberg D

Preliminary Reading Bober S

Models of Economic Growth (Harper Intershynational 1973)

The Economics of Cycle and Growth (Wiley 1968)

100

Clark J S amp Cohen M (eds)

Hicks J R

Meade J E

Neher P A

(li) Development Text

Business Fluctuations Growth and Economic Stabilisation A Reader (Random House 1963)

A Contribution to the Theory of the Trade Cycle (Clarendon 1967)

A Neoclassical Theory of Economic Growth (Allen amp Unwin 1962)

Economic Growth and Development ~ A Mathematical Introduction (Wiley 1971)

No specific text is required Students will be required to read articles and chapters from books relevant to the various sections of this half of the course Below is a list of some of the main books which will be referred to The student IS enclturaged to read extensively and these refershyences should be conSIdered as valuable sources

References Bauer P T

Enke S

Gill R T

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Meier G M (ed)

Myrdal G

Myint H

Szentes T

Dissent on Development (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1971)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1963)

Economic Development Past and Present 3rd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973)

Economic Development rev edn (Norton 1968)

Economic Development 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Leading Issues in Economic Development 2nd edn (Oxford UP 1970)

Asian Drama (Twentieth Century Fund 1968)

The Economics of Developing Countries 3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967)

The Political Economy of Underdevelopshyment (Budapest Akademiai Kiado 1973)

423102 International Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week and 1 seminar hour per fortnight

101

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content (0 The pure theory of international trade Comparative costs the Heckscher-Ohlin theorem Critical assessment of these and other theories of trade The theory of protection tariffs and quota restricshytions on imports Australian proteotion policy Customs union theory Relationships between ~conomic growth and trade

(li) International monetary economics The foreign exchange marshyket The balance of payments The foreign trade multiplier Balance of payments disequilibrium and adjustment policies Effects of internal expenditure changes Analysis of exchange rate changes under adjustable peg and floating rate systems optimum currency areas Exchange controls Internal and external balance The international monetary system and its reforms Theoretical aspects of international capital movements and the implications of overseas investment in Australia Foreign aid

Texts Ellsworth P T amp

Leith J C OR

Scammell W M

Snape R H

Wells S J

References Bhagwati J (ed) Caves R E amp

Johnson H G (eds) Clement M O et al

Cooper R R (ed) Heller H R

Heller H R

Kindleberger C P

The International Economy 5th edn (Macmillan 1975)

International Trade and Payments (Macmillan 1974)

International Trade and the Australian Economy 2nd edn (Longman 1973)

International Economics rev edn (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

International Trade (Penguin 1972) Readings in International Economics

(Allen amp Unwin 1968) Theoretical Issues in International

Economics (Constable 1967) Internaiional Finance (Penguin 1969) International Trade Theory and Empirical

Evidence 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall 1973) International Monetary Economics

(Prentice-Hall 1974) International Economics 5th edn (Irwin

1973) McColl G D (ed) Overseas Trade and Investment (Pelican

1972)

102

I j

I

423103 Public Ecouomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week plus seminars

One 3-hour paper

The effects of government intervention in the economy through the budget and through the operation of puhhcly-owned busuess undershytakings Inter-governmental fiscal relatlOnshlp~ are exammed At the microeconomic level there IS an analysts of -e effects of tax and expenditure policies on in particular commumty welfare and incentives At the macroeconomic level aggregative mdels ~e used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economIC pohcles for stability and growth

Preliminary Reading Eckstein O

References Buchanan J M amp

Flowers M R Culbertson J M

Fromm G amp Taubman P

Houghton R W (ed)

Johansen L Keiser N F

Mathews R L amp Jay W R C

Musgrave R A amp P B

Peacock A amp Shaw G K

Shoup C S

Public Finance (Prentice Hall)

The Public Finances (Irwin)

Macroeconomic Theory and Stabilisation Policy (McGraw-Hill)

Public Economic Theory and Policy (Collier-Macmillan)

Public Finance (Penguin)

Public Economics (North Holland) Readings in Macroeconomics (Prenticeshy

Hall) Federal Finance (Nelson)

Public Finance in Theory and Practice (McGraw-Hill)

The Economic Theory of Fiscal Policy (Allen amp Unwin)

Public Finance (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson)

423105 Economics Honours Seminar II

Prerequisites Economics II

103

Corequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Two of Growth and Development International Economics Public Economics

I seminar hours per week alternating between the 2 subjects selected

One 3-hour paper

At least two of the areas of Public Economics International Economics and Growth and Development

423203 History of Economic Thought

Prerequisites Economics II

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content Historical perspective and an integrating view of ~e subjec~ m~tter of other courses in economic analysis The followmg contnbutlons to economic thought are examined - the Gre~k analysts the ~~rly and later Scholastics the Mercantil~s the Physlocrats tJ1e ClaSSIclSts (including Adam Smith Mal thus Ricardo and J S Mill) the m~rshyginal utility theorists the general equilibrium school and the Austnan school

Texts Blaug M

Ekelund R B amp HebeIlt R F

Roll E Spiegal H W

References Gordon B

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A History of Economic Theory and Method (McGraw-Hill)

A History of Economic Thought (Faber) The Growth of Economic Thought

(Prentice-Hall )

Economic Analysis Before Adam Smith (Macmillan)

104

OBrien D P

Schumpeter J A

Sowell T

The Classical Economists (Oxford VP) A History of Economic Analysis (Oxford

VP) Classical Economics Reconsidered

(Princeton VP)

423207 Theory of Economic Policy

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics II

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The logic design and implementation of economic policy A priori welfare criteria and discussion of their applicability to the assessment of macro policy several policy models are discussed ranging from the simple satisficing type model to attempts to derive policy from a social welfare function Case studies of macro policy with special reference to Australian problems (li) The welfare foundations of microeconomic policy Approaches to microeconomic -policy adopted by governments in recent years Theoretical and practical issues which arise with the implementation of microeconomic policies The rationale for post-disaster co-opershyation direct controls versus taxes obtaining a consensus on redistrishybutive policies patenting and licensing of government inventions voting versus pricing mechanisms occupational licensing subsidies in transport and trading in public goods

Texts Culyer A J

Shaw G K

Winch D M

References Morley S A

Tinbergen J

Tinbergen J

The Economics of Social Policy (Martin Robertson 1973)

Macroeconomic Policy 2nd edn (Robertson)

Analytical Welfare (Penguin)

The Economics of Inflation (Dryden 1971)

Economic Policy Principles and Design (North-Holland 1967)

On the Theory of Economic Policy (NorthshyHolland 1966)

105

423208 Econometrics I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Economic Statistics II or Statistical Analysis

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

A knowledge of matrix algebra and of the mathematical statistics dealt with in Statistical Analysis I is recommended The course is concerned with examining the usefulness of single equation regression analysis in applied economic research and also an introduction to simultaneous estimation procedures

Text Johnston J

References Fox K A Goldberger A Hadley G Huang D S

Kmenta J Koutsoyiannis A Wonnacott R J amp

T H

Econometric Methods 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1972)

Intermediate Economic Statistics (Wiley) Econometrics (Wiley) Linear Algebra (Addison-Wesley) Regression and Econometric Methods

(Wiley) Elements of Econometrics (Macmillan) Theory of Econometrics (Macmillan) Econometrics (Wiley)

423204 Mathematical Economics

Prerequisites

Advisory Prerequisite

Hours

Examination

Content

Economics I

Second Level Short Course Mathematics or its equivalent

3 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The mathematical reformulation and interpretation of traditional micro- and macro-economic theory (li) Modem capital and growth theory and mathematical programshyming

106

Texts Dernburg T amp J

Henderson J M amp Quandt R

References Benavie A

Chiang A

Gandolfo G

Hadley G amp Kemp M C

Intriligator M D

Naylor T H amp Vernon J M

Read R C

Vandermeulen D C

Macroeconomic Analysis An Introduction to Comparative Statics and Dynamics (Addison-Wesley 1969)

Microeconomic Theory bull A Mathematical Approach 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Mathematical Techniques for Economic Analysis (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1974)

Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics (North-Holland 1971)

Finite Mathematics in Business and Economics (North-Holland 1972)

Mathematical Optimization and Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

Microeconomics and Decision Models of the Firm (Harcourt Brace amp World 1969)

A Mathematical Background for Economists and Social Scientists (Prentice-Hall 1972)

Linear Economic Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971)

423206 LabOUJ Relations (To be replaced by Industrial Relations III in 1978)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Labour Economics

2 lecture hours per week and 1 t-2 hours seminar per fortnight

One 3~hour paper and progressive assessment

(i) Industrial and labour relations behaviour Theories of the labour movement the nature of work and alienation the emergence and impact of large business and bureaucratic organisations colleotive bargaining negotiation and general industrial relations theory

107

(li) The Australian system of industrial relations in terms of the development organisations behaviour and interaction of the actors involved especially unions employers associations and tribunals

(ill) The nature of industrial conflict workers participation in management and white collar unions

Preliminary Reading Martin R M

Texts Chamberlain N W

amp Kuhn J W Hyman R Isaac J E amp

Ford G W (eds) Kerr C et aI

Matthews P W D amp Ford G W (eds)

Sturmthal A

Walker K F

Rejerences Child J

Qarke R O et al

Dunlop J T

Flanders A (ed) Fox A

Howard W amp Riaoh P

ILO

Reynolds L G

Trade Unions in Australia Who Runs Them Who Belongs - Their Politics Their Power (Penguin 1975)

Collective Bargaining 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1965)

Strikes (Fontana-Collins 1972) Australian Labour Relations-Readings 2nd

edn (Sun Books 1971) Industrialism and Industrial Man (Penguin

1973) Australian Trade Unions (Sun Books

1968)

Comparative Labor Movements Ideological Roots and Institutional Development (Wadsworth 1972)

Australian Industrial Relations Systems (Harvard UP 1970)

Unionism and the Labor Movement (Macmillan 1971)

Workers Participation in Management in Britain (Heinemann 1972)

Industrial Relations Systems (Southern Illinois UP 1971)

Collective Bargaining (Penguin 1969) A Sociology oj Work in Industry (Collier

Macmillan 1971) Productivity Agreements and Australian

Wage Determination (Wiley 1973) Collective Bargaining in Industrialised

Market Economics (ILO Geneva 1974)

Labor Economics and Labor Relations 6th edn (Prendce-Hall 1974)

108

Somers G G (ed) Essays in Industrial Relations Theory (Iowa UP 1969)

Warner M (ed) The Sociology oj the Workplace (Allen amp Unwin 1973)

424100 Economics IV - (Advanced Economic Analysis)

Content Students are offered a choice between alternative programmes (i) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 4

units plus a thesis embodying reSults of a research investigation OR

(li) Topics chosen from those listed below comprising at least 6 units

In 1977 the topics to be offered are -Economebics n 1 unit Economic Development 1 unit Economic Planning 1 unit History of Modem Economic Thought -1 unit Macroeconomic Theory 1 unit Microeconomic Theory 1 unit Regional Economics -1 unit T~ort Economics t unit Special Topic (Economics of Inflation) -1 unit WeUare Economics t unit Environmental Economics t unit Plus Economebics I (where approved) 1 unit

424111 Economebics n Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Basically a continuation of Econometrics I with its prime interest being on the problems involved in econometric model building and simultaneous estimation An introduction is also given to Spectral Analysis and Bayesian Estimation Techniques Each student will be expected to complete a piece of applied econometric research

109

References Brown T M

Bridge J L

Christ C F Dhrymes P

Fishman G S

Hood W C amp Koopmans T C

Klein L R et al Malinvaud E

Theil H

Specification and Use of Econometric Models (Macmillan)

Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971)

Econometric Models and Methods (Wiley) Econometrics Statistical Foundations and

Applications (Harper amp Row) Spectral Methods in Econometrics

(Harvard) Stu4ies in Econometric Method (Wiley)

Econometric Gaming (Macmillan) Statistical Methods of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland) Principles of Econometrics (Northshy

Holland)

424107 Economic Development

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content The course -commences with a general discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and of what constitutes developm~nt Attenti(m is then focused on development and underdevelopment m an hisshytorical perspective Some theoretical models of development in a dual economy are then advanced The dualistic struc~re of le~s developed countries is further investigated and explanatIons of thlS structure are advanced These latter discussions lead into the policy section of the course where issues such as investment allocation criteria agricultural development industrialisation and financing development are taken up

Text Meier G M (ed)

References Baran P

Leading Issues in Economic Development (Oxford VP 1970)

The Political Economy of Growth (Pelican 1973)

110

Bauer P T amp Vamey B S

Enke S Hagen E E

Higgins B

Kindleberger C

Morgan T amp Betz G W (eds)

Myint H

Rhodes R F (ed)

Theberge J (ed)

The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries (Cambridge VP 1973)

Economics for Development (Dobson 1972) The Economics of Development (Irwin

1968) Economic Development 2nd edn (Norton

1968) Economic Development (McGraw-Hill

1965) Economic Development - Readings in

Theory and Practice (Wadsworth 1970) The Economics of Developing Countries

3rd edn (Hutchinson 1967) imperialism and Underdevelopment A

Reader (Monthly Review Press 1970) The Economics of Trade and Development

(Wiley 1968)

424106 EcODOnUC PbuuUng

Prerequisites

Hoursmiddot

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture honrs per week

One 31hour paper

~e stud~ of the theory and implementation of economic planning WIth particular emphasis on the economic behaviour of the system as a whole- rather than the behaviour of households and firms ~i) The logic prope~s and operational aspects of planned systems m command economIes as well as mixed economic systems (ii) Some t~chnical ~pects of planning eg input-output systems shadow pncmg and lmear programming (iii) Case studies of applied planning sys~ems with an emphasis on meanmgful cross-country comparisons The cours~ is as free of ideological bi~ ~s humanly possible and for converuence Ignores problems of statistical estimatioJ)

References Chakravarty S

Halm G N

The Logic of Investment Planning (NorthshyHolland 1968)

ECOlwmic Systems A Comparative Analysis 3rd edn (Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1968)

111

Heal G M

Kohler H

Lange O amp Taylor F M

The Theory of Economic Planning (North~ Holland 1973)

Welfare and Planning An Analysis of Capitalism versus Socialism (Wiley 1966)

On the Economic Theory of Socialism (McGraw~Hill 1964)

424108 History of Modem Economic Thought (May not be offered in 1977)

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

The significance of contemporary economic analysis cannot be appre~ ciated fully without an awareness of the thought of earlier economists Such awareness provides perspective for judgment of the strengths and weaknesses of the analytical tools and techniques fashionable in currently orthodox economics A perspective based on consideration of economic thought in the decades immediately preceding the Keynesian revolution the po~ ularisation of econometrics and other notable developments The period dealt with ranges from 1890 to the mid 1930s British economic thought from Alfred Marshall to John Maynard Keynes and American economic thought from John Bates Oark to Wesley C Mitchell and leading Continental contributions are considered

Text Napoleoni C

References Blaug M

Hutchison T W

Schumpeter J A Seligman B B

Shackle G L S

Stigler G J

Economic Thought of the Twentieth Century (Martin Robertson 1972)

Economic Theory in Retrospect (Heinemann)

A Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929 (Oxford U~P 1953)

Ten Great Economists (Oxford UP 1951) Main Currents in Modern Economics (Free

1962) The Years of High Theory (Cambridge

UP 1967) Production and Distribution Theories

(Macmillan 1941)

112

424114 Macroeconomic Theory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

(i) The static Keynesian theory of national income determination the multiplier analysis the demand and supply of money the term structure of interest rates consumption and investment functions and the microeconomic foundations of macro theory (ii) The analysis of dynamic prQblems of business cycles and economic growth (iii) The theory of economic policy Special considerations are given to the problems of stagflation and economic growth

References Aschheim J

Bailey M J

Evans M K

Gurley J C amp Shaw E S

Hagger A J

Hansen B

Johnson H G

Keynes J M

Leinonhufvud A

Ott D J et al

Patinkin D

Pesek B P amp Saving T R

Smith W L amp Teigen R (eds)

Sweeney R J

Macroeconomics - Income and Monetary Theory (Merrill 1969)

National Income and the Price Level 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1970)

Macroeconomic Activity Theory Foreshycasting and Control (Harper amp Row 1970)

Money in a Theory of Finance (Brooking 1960)

Price Stability Growth and Balance (Cheshire 1968)

A Survey of General Equilibrium Systems (McGraw-HilI 1970)

Macroeconomics and Monetary Theory (Gray Mills 1971)

The General Theory of Employment Intershyest and Money (Harcourt Brace amp World 1936)

On Keynesian Economics and the Economics of Keynes (Oxford UP 1968)

Macroeconomic Theory (McGraw-Hill 1975)

Money Interest and Prices 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1965)

Money Wealth and Economic Theory (Macmillan 1967)

Readings in Money National Income and Stabilization Policy (Irwin)

A Macro Theory with Micro Foundations (South-Western 1974)

113

424103 Microeconomic Tbeory

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

Content Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in mind Topics include recent advances in demand and production ~eory eqUilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence pnnclple Paretian optimality market failure including decreasin~ costs unshycertainty second-best solutions recent developments m ohgopoly theoryan examination of variations in the quality of products ~d in product differentiation with market structure re~ources allocati~n over time implications of uncertainty atld leammamp for econ~mtc behaviour and planning economic and socIal mechan~ms for adJustshy

ing to risk and their limitations aspects of central~ation and ~ecen-tralisation in economic systems elements of ecolOgical economICS

Texts Henderson J M amp

Quandt R E Tisdell C

Microeconomic Theory 2nd edn (McGrawshyHill 1971)

Microeconomics The Theory of Economic Allocation (Wiley 1972)

References No single text is sll~tabie and a full reading list will be supplied Background texts of relevance mclude Becker G Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Brems H Quantitative Economic Theory (Wiley

1968) Horowitz 1 Decision Making and Theory of the Firm

(Holt Rinehart amp Winston 1970) Intriligator M D Mathematical Optimization and Economic

Theory (Prentice-Hall 1971) Malinvaud E Lectures on Mieroeconomic Theory (North~

Holland 1972)

S I P A Foundations of Economic Analysis amue son (Harvard uP 1947)

424109 RegionalEconomics

Prer~quisites

Hours

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

114

Examination

Content

Progressive assessment plus one 2~hour paper

The application of economic analysis to the economic activity and problems of sub-national areas defined by homogeneity nodality or programtning criteria Topics include regional accounts inputshyoutput descriptions of regional economies and gravity models regional income determination and regional growth impact of growth on the economic structure of regions regional impacts of national policy and the design of regional policy under the dual constraints of national objectives and regional structure Selected case studies stress cross-country comparisons of regional policies

Text Richardson H

References Boudeville J R

Regional Economics (Weidenfeld amp Nicolson 1969 )

Problems of RegIonal Economic Planning (Edinburgh UP 1966)

Dean R Det al (eds) Spatial Economic Theory (Free Press 1970) Isard W Methods of Regional Analysis (MIT

Press 1960) Leahy W J ot aI (eds) Urban Economics (Free Press 1970) McKee D L et aI Regional Economics (Free Press 1970)

(eds) Needleman L (ed) Nourse H O Perloff H S et al

Stilwell F J B

Regional A nalysis (Penguin 1968) Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) Regions Resources and econQmic Growth

(Johns Hopkins 1960) Australian Urban and Regional Developshy

ment (A amp NZ Book Co 1974)

424112 Transport Ec~nomics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

7 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

An introduction to the application of economic concepts to transport problems at both a theoretical and a practical level It is usual to place an emphasis on either urban or non-urban transportation problems depending on the interests of students The course com-

US

bines a study of the relevant economic and quantitative techniques with appropriate insights into necessary institutional and historical questions

Preliminary Reading Munby D (ed) Robbins M Sharp C H

Transport (Penguin 1968) The Railway Age (Penguin 1965) Transport Economics (Macmillan 1973)

Texts To be advised according to the students particular interests

424115 Economics of loBation

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week

One 3-hour paper

This course begins with sketching out the various explanations of inflation including the microeconomic foundations of employment and inflation theory and its causes and effects It proceeds to evaluate the vast body of theoretical and ~tnpirical Iitera~ which discusses the existence unIqueness and stabihty of the Philhps Tradeshyoff between inflation and unemployment and its modern development incorporating price expectations The issues involved in choos~g between fiscal monetary and incomes policy to combat stagfiatin and the role that indexation of wages and salanes taxes and financtal assets can play will be discussed The related problems f iml0rted inflation regional and sectoral une~plyment will also be mvestiyenated at some length Special reference lS given to the post-war expenence in Australia

References Bach G L

Ball R J amp Doyle P (eds)

Burton J Jones A

Katz S I

Nevile J W amp Stammer D W (eds)

The New Inflation Causes and Cures (Brown UP 1972)

Inflation (Penguin 1969)

Wage Inflation (Macmillan 1972) The New Inflation The Politics of Prices

and Incomes (Penguin 1973) Imported Inflation and the Balance of Payshy

ments (New York UP 1973) Inflation and Unemployment (Pelican

1972)

116

Parkin M amp Sumner M T (eds)

Phelps E S et al

Taylor J

Trevithick J A amp Mulvey C

Incomes Policy and Inflation (Manchester UP 1972)

Microeconomic Foundations of Employshyment and Inflation Theory (Macmillan 1970)

Unemployment and Wage Inflation with Special Reference to Britain and the USA (Longman 1974)

The Economics of Inflation (Martin Robertson 1975)

424105 Welfare Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

2 lecture hours per week for half year

(ne 2-hour paper

TJle purpose of this Course is to develop an awareness of the limitshy~tios and s~engths of basic economic theory in guiding policy which lS rume~ at lmprov~g the economic welfare of society The course s~arts WIth an appralSal of welfare maximisation by the classical marshygmal approach tgepter with modern refinements It traces the de~elopment of cntena for welfare improvement discussing compenshysation tests ad the problems encountered in using individual prefershyences to ~enve a~ceptablesocial choices A section is devoted to ~e empmcal appbcation of welfare criteria The course concludes WIth an appralSal of the role of power in economics and a discussion of models Of Cnftict as found in orthodox econonic theory game theory bargammg theory and theories of social choice

References Boulding K E Farrell M J

Nath S K

Rapaport A

Rapaport A

Tullock G

Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) Readings in Welfare Economics (Macmill~n

1973)

A Reappraisal of Welfare Economics (Routledge amp Kegan Paul 1969)

Fights Games and Debates (Michigan UP 1960)

Conflict in Man-Made Environment (Penguin 1974)

Towards a Mathematics of Politics (1967) 117

I

Weiptraub E R

Winch D M

Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975)

Analytical Welfare Economics (Penguin 1972)

424113 Environmental -Economics

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Requirements for Honours degree

1 t lecture hours per week

Individual arrangement

This course is concerned with the environmental impact of our growshying economy It considers poIicies that may help to redirect techshynological and demographic momentum More particularly topics covered include fertility reduction externalities prohibitive law pollution control cost-benefit analysis conservation resource exhaustion urban environmental problems and the debate on economic growth

References Dorfman R amp N S

(eds) Ehrlich P R amp A H

Freeman III A M et al

Lecomber R

Mishan E J

Mishan E J

Pearce D W

Seneca J J amp Taussig M K

Weintraub E et al

Economics of the Environment (Norton 1972)

Population Resources and Environment (Freeman 1970)

The Economics of Environmental Policy (Wiley 1970)

Economic Growth Versus the Environment (Macmillan 1975)

The Costs of Economic Growth (Pelican 1967)

Elements of Cost Benefit Analysis (Unwin 1972)

Enviro~mental Economics (Longmans 1976)

Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hail 1974)

The Economic Growth Controversy (1973)

118

DEPARTMENT OF LEGAL STUDIES

432105 Administrative Law

Prerequisites

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper

The nature operation and role of administrative law in Australia as an evolving ae~ of public a~ ~oncened principally with the legal bases of adm~trative and Judlclalrevlew of exercises of statutory powers vested m governmental organs and instrumentalities and ~ith s~cific lega remedies ~~ich may be available to persons ~laim-109 redress of gnevances ansmg from bureaucratic action

Prescribed Text Benjafield D G amp

Whitmore H Principles of Australian Administrative Law

(Law Book Co)

Prescribed Printed Materials Extracts from judgments in selected leading cases and short explanshyatory notes to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Brett P amp

Hogg P W Friedmann W

STATUTES

Cases and Materials on Administrative Law (Butterworths)

Law in a Changing Society (Penguin) Commonwealth Administrative Review

Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Report of the Law Reform Commission on Committee Report 1971 (Aust Govt Printer)

Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Ombudofman Act 1974 (NSW Govt Printer)

119

432110 Business and Consumer Credit Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

This will be specified in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by whioh finance and credit are obtained (a) by business and (b) by consumers In relation to acquisition of land the terms contract and mortgage will be studied and in relation to acquisition of goods there will be a brief study of stock-in-trade financing hire purchase lay-by sales bills of sale pledges and liens The course includes an examination of the means of raising finance available to registered companies by means of shares and debentures and in particular the device of a floating charge Finally there is consideration of moves in Australia and overseas to achieve uniform systems of regulating the supply of credit to consumers

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for ] 978)

432115 Consumer Protection Law (This subjeot will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3~hour paper at the end of the year

This course commences with a study of the means which have been availed of by the courts to protect consumers and in particular of the early device of implying terms into contracts for the sale of goods and of the treatment of exclus~on clauses The course proceeds to a study of the protections afforded consumers by the sale of goods and hire purchase legislation eg the implied terms as to fitness for purpose and merchantable quality False or misleading advertising

120

is studied in the context of the common law s32 of the Consumer Protection Act 1969 (NSW) and ss 52 and 53 of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Legislation dealing with specific mischiefs in the consumer area and product safety standards and product inform~ ation standards are examined The course concludes with a study of certain institutional structures of importance to consumers includshying State consumer affairs bodies the Trade Practices Commission and small claims tribunals

Texts

Borrie A amp Diamond A L

Taperell G Q et a1

STATUTES

References

Australian Consumers Association

Atiyah P Collinge J G

Molomby Report

Molomby Report

Sutton K C T

The Consumer Society and the Law (Penguin)

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterwortbs)

Consumer Claims Tribunals Act 1974 (NSW)

Hite Purchase Act 1960 (NSW Pyramid Sales Act 1974 (NSW) Referral Sales Act 1974 (NSW Sale of Goods Act 1923 (NSW) (as

amended by the Commercial Transactions (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1974)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Cth) Unsolicited Goods and Services Act 1974

(NSW)

Choice (especially the editorials and occasional articles on legal matters)

The Sale of Goods (Pitman) Law of Marketing in Australia and New

Zealand (Thesaurus 1971) The Consumer and the Law (Committee for

Post-Graduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1973)

Report on Fair Consumer Credit Laws (Law Council of Australia 1972)

Final Report of the Committee on Consumer Protection (1962)

Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and New Zealand (Law Book Co)

121

Trade Practices Act Lectures - The Trade Practices Act 1974 (Committee for PostshyGraduate Studies in the Department of Law University of Sydney 1975)

New South Wales Law Working Paper on the Sale of Goods (1975) Reform Commission

433200 Industrial Law

Prerequ~site

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory) Students who have not completed the preshyrequisite or a similar subject should consider undertaking the preparatory subject Introshyduction to the Australian Legal System (see page 124)

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The subject is divided into five parts Relationship of Employer and Employee Contract of Employment Statutes Regulating Employshyment Collective Aspects of Industrial Law Compensation for Injuries The student will examine the principles involved in identifying and defining the relationship of employer and employee the formation termination and terms of contracts of employment with particular reference to the terms relating to the duration of the contract and duties of the employer and the employees some of the important statutes regulating the employment relationship eg Annual Holidays Act 1944 Long Service Leave Act 1955 the division of power to regulate industrial matters between the Commonwealth and States and also the status of trade unions strikes and lockouts award makshying and award fixing and the legal framework of the Commonwealth and State systems of conciliation and arbitration the two methods of compensation presently used common law action for negligence and the Workers Compensation Scheme and the proposed reforms in the National Compensation Scheme

Suggested Preliminary Reading Cullen C L amp An Outline of Industrial Law (Law Book

Macken J J Co) Sykes E I The Employer the Employee and the Law

3rd edn (Law Book Co)

122

Texts Sykes E I amp

Glasbeek H J STATUTES

References Boulter N

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Foenander O de R

Glass H H amp McHugh M H

Hepple B A amp OHiggins P

Macken J J

Mills C P Mills C P

Mills C P

ODea R Portus J H

Portus J H

Shtein B J L amp Lindgren K E

Sykes E I

Labour Law in Australia (Butterworths)

Annual Holidays Act 1944 (NSW Govt Printer)

Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904 (Aust Govt Printer)

Industrial Arbitration Act 1940 (NSW Govt Printer)

Long Service Leave Act 1955 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Act 1926 (NSW Govt Printer)

Workeri Compensation Law and Practice in NsW (Law Book Co)

Australian Industrial Regulations (Law Book Co)

Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia (Law Book Co)

Recent Developments in Australian Industrial Regulation (Law Book Co)

Trade Unionism in Australia (Law Book Co)

The Liability of Employers (Law Book Co)

Individual Employment Law (Sweet amp Maxwell)

Australian Industrial Law - the Constitutional Basis (Law Book Co)

Federal Industrial Laws (Butterworths) New South Wales Industrial Laws

(Butterworths) Workers Compensation in New South Wales

(Butterworths) Industrial Relations in Australia (West) Australian Compulsory Arbitration 1900-

1970 (Law Book Co) The Development of Australian Trade

Union La~ (Melbourne UP) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Strike Law in Australia (Law Book Co)

123

STATUTES Apprentices Act 1909 (NSW Govt

Printer) Factories Shops and Industries Act 1962

(NSW GoVt Printer) Scaffolding and Lifts Act 1912 (NSW

Govt Printer)

Introduction to the Australian Legal System To cater for students who have not studied law before an introshyductory course will be offered in the week before term commences Classes will be held from Monday to Friday commencing at 530 pm and finishing at 730 pm Further information can be obtained f~om the Secretary Department of Legal Studies after February 1 1977 Texts for this introductory course are

Enright C S

Derham D I etal Vermeesch R B amp

Lindgren K E

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co) Chpts 1 amp 2 should be read before the first class

An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

The above three books will be on closed reserve in the University Library

432120 Law of Business Organisations

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

One end of year examination

Sole Trader Partuership and Company Law

Texts Ford H A J Mason H H

Vermeesch R B amp Lindgren K E

Principles of Company Law (Butterworths) Casebook on Australian Company Law

(Butterworths) Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

124

STATUTES

References Afterman A B amp

Baxt R Gower L C B

Companies Act 1961 (NSW Govt Printer)

Partnership Act 1892 (NSW Govt Printer)

Cases and Materials on Corporations and Associations (Law Book Co)

Modern Company Law (Stevens) with Australian Supplement by Kavass amp Baxt (Law Book Co)

432125 Law of Contract (This subject will be offered each year with the exception of 1977 which is a transitional year)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

To be advised

The course comprises a study of the general principles of the law of contract along fairly conventional lines Included are an introshyduction to the concept of contract the formation of a contract includshying offer and acceptance the doctrine of consideration and intention to create legal relations formal requirements matters affecting conshytractual assent illegality privity of contract performance of contract analysis of contractual terms discharge of contract particularly upon rescission and frustration breach of contract and remedies for breach

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty Handshybook for 1978)

431100 Legal Studies I

Prerequisites Nil

Duration

Hours

Examination

One full academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

125

Content The subject will examine some basic legal concepts and the divisions of law and the institutions of the Australian legal system It wiil also enable students to acquire special skills for the examination of legal materials such as an ability to analyse statements contained in judgments and to interpret provisions of an Act of Parliament Foundation of the processes of law-making through judicial decisions primary and delegated legislation and some theories as to the nature and function of law in society will be considered

Suggested Preliminary Derham D P et al Sawer G Shtein B J L amp

Lindgren K E Williams G L

Texts

Reading An Introduction to Law (Law Book Co) The Australian and the Law (Pelican) Introduction to Business Law (Law Book

Co) Learning the Law (Stevens)

Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths) Lindgren K E

The Constitution of the Commonwealth of Australia (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Printed materials to be issued to students at the commencement of the course

References Nettheim G amp

Chisolm R Sawer G

Sawer G

Understanding Law (Butterworths)

Australian Government Today (Melbourne UP)

The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

432130 Special Contracts Executors and Trustees Bankruptcy

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

126

Content The course covers a number of special contracts- hire purchase sale of goods cheques insurance guarantee and indemnity and bailshyment The subject includes a study of the most important provisions of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 The nature of a trust and the duties of a trustee and the making of wills and the administration of deceasshyed estates are also examined

Text Vermeesch R B amp Business Law of Australia (Butterworths)

Lindgren K E

STATUTES

References Curzon L B

Else-Mitchell The Hon R amp Parsons R W

Jacobs K Rose D J (ed)

Sutton K C T

Bankruptcy Act 1966 (Commonwealth) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Introduction to the Law of Trusts (Macdonald amp Evans)

Hire Purchase Law (Law Book (0)

Law of Trusts (Butterworths) Lewis Australian Bankruptcy Law (Law

Book Co) The Law of Sale of Goods in Australia and

New Zealand (Law Book Co)

432135 The CorporatioJi and Anstralian Society (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academicmiddot year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment and end of year examination

An interdiscipl~nary study of the corporation as a legal commercial and social unit with reference to the historical development of the corporation the corporations power in the Australian Constitution the legal powers and responsibilities of corporate management legal aspects of the financing of Australian corporations the corporation

127

and industrialmiddot property the corporation and problems relating to the environment crime and criminology and consumerism

Texts References

(These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978)

432140 Trade Practices Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I

Half academic year

2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Progressive assessment

The course deals generally with the operation of the Trade Practices Act and in particular with the scope of the six trade praoti~s de~t with by the Act contracts arrangemen~s ~nd unders~andmgs m restraint of trade or commerce monopohzatlOn exclUSIve dealmg resale price maintenance price discrimination and anti-competitive mergers

Texts Taperell G Q et al

STATUTES

References Areeda P Aust Institute of

Political Science CCH Australia

Ltd CCH Australia

Ltd Hunter A (ed) Kefauver E Korah

Masterman G G amp Solomon E

Trade Practices and Consumer Protection (Butterworths)

Trade Practices Act 1974 (Com) (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Antitrust Analysis (Little Brown) Big Business in Australia (Angus amp

Robertson) An Introduction to Trade Practices and

Consumer Protection in Australia (CCH) Australian Trade Practices Reporter (CCH)

Monopoly and Competition (Penguin) In a Few Hands (Penguin) Monopolies and Restrictive Practices

(Penguin) Australian Trade Practices Law

(Butterworths)

128

Neale A D

Nieuwenhuysen J P (ed)

Schreiber H Taylor J amp Donald B

Walker G De Q

The Anti Trust Law of the USA (Cambridge UP)

Australian Trade Practices Readings (Cheshire)

Resale Price Maintenance (Law Book Co)

Australian Monopoly Law (Cheshire)

430101 Advanced Company Law (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Law of Business Organisations (advisory)

One academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive Assessment

11he course is a study at postgraduate level of certain areas of comshypany and related law some of which are not dealt with at aU in the typical company law course at undergraduate level eg securities industry law the corporations power in the Commonwealth Conshystitution As well many of the classical topics of company law will be studied in depth eg duties of directors the nature of the contract comprised in the registered companys memorandum and articles of association the legal nature of shares and debentures the legal relationships between the company and outside contracting parties the companys employees and management insider trading abuse of corporate opportunity minority oppression

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430102 International and Interstate Business Law

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Legal Studies I ( advisory )

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

129

Content The course will cover the aspects of the law itemised below The aim will be to give an outline framework of all the areas mentioned with in-depth discussion of very specific topics chosen because of their basic significance current interest or relevance as illustrations of the legal complexities involved 1 Carriage of goods by sea - the nature and operation of chartershy

parties and bills of lading the Hague Rules 2 Carriage of goods by air 3 Section 92 of the Commonwealth Constitution - freedom of

interstate trade and commerce 4 The international sale of goods - CIF and EOB contracts 5 The law of international financing operations 6 Customs excise and tariffs 7 Commercial problems in the conflict of laws 8 The multinational corporation - problems of legal control Detailed statute and case studies will be used in the course

Suggested Preliminary Reading lvamy E R Payne and Ivamys Carriage of Goods by

Hardy (ed) Sea 9th edn (Butterworths)

Te4ts Students will be advised in the first class session of any books which they must possess

References Carver H Colinveaux Cheshire G C Faigenbaum J I amp

Hanks P J Guest A G (ed)

Carriage by Sea (Stevens) Private International Law (ButterwOIths) Australian Constitutional Law

(Butterworths) Chitty on Contracts (Vol II only) (Sweet

amp Maxwell)

430105 Law of Stamp Death Gift and Estate Duties (This subject will not be offered in 1977 but will be offered in 1978)

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Law of Contract (advisory)

One full academic year

2 lecture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

130

Content Study of the Stamp Dties Act 1920 (NSW) the Gift Duty Act 1941 (Clth) the GIft Duty Assessment Act 1941 (Clth) the Estate Duty Act 1914 (Clth) and the Estate Duty Assessment Act 1914 (Clth) The constitutional basis for imposition of death duties and the constitutional limits on the respective powers of the Commo~wealth and the States in this respect Categories of actual ~nd not1Onal estate Trusts and discretionary trusts (including mcome tax aspects thereof) Estate planning its social moral and political aspects Estate planning schemes which have been judicially considered Economic aspects of death duties

Texts References

These will be stated in the Faculty handshybook for 1978

430104 Political and Legal Institutions

Prerequisite

Duration

Hours

Examination

Content

Legal Studies I (advisory)

One full academic year

2 le~ture (or seminar) hours per week

Progressive assessment

The course studies at postgraquate level the major institutions in our legal and political system - the Monarchy the Federal System Parliaments Courts and the Executive It looks first of all at their structure construction and power and then examines carefully their operation making a critical assessment of how they carry out their functions and their impact on the citizen

T~xt Enright C S

STATUTES

References AIPS

Constitutional Law of Australia (Law Book Co)

Commonwealth of Australia Constitutzon Att 1900 (Aust Govt Publishing Service)

Constitution Act 1902 (NSW Govt Printer)

Who Runs Australia (Angus amp Robertson)

131

Byrt W J amp Crean F

Encel S

Fajgenbaum J amp Hanks P

Hansom A H amp Crick B

Mackenzie K Mayer H Sawer G

Spigelman J

Government and Politics in Australia (McGraw~HilI )

Cabinet Government in Australia (Cheshire)

Australian Constitutional Law (Butterworths)

The Commons in Transition (Fontana)

The English Parliament (Pelican) Australian Politics (Cheshire) The Australian Constitution (Aust Govt

Publishing Service) Secrecy (Angus amp Robertson)

MAJOR SUBJECTS FROM OTHER FACULTIES

Faculty of Arts

351100 Geography I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Nil 2 lecture hours and 3 hours practical work per week 1 tutorial hour per fortnight and 3 days of field work

To be advised

Content A study of the structure and interactiln of two major systems ~e ecological system that links man and hls envlronment and the spatlal system that links one region with another in a complex mte~ohange of flows The study explores the internal structure and the hnkages between each of the basic components in Ithe two systems The practical programme is designed to enable stud~nts to gam proficiency in and understanding of t~etools of geographlcal anal)llsl Methods in the cartographic and statlstical orgamzatlon of geographlc data are studied

Text Haggett P

References

371100 History I

Prerequisites

Geography A Modern Synthesis 2nd edn (Harper amp Row 1975)

To be advised

Aspects of Modern History

Nil 132

Hours

Examination

Content

3 hours per week plus compulsory weekly tutorial

Two end of year papers

Each aspect will be studied as a separate unit The emphasis throughshyout will be on issues and ideas and no attempt will be made to present a chronological narrative In addition students will be introduced to some of the problems and techniques of historical interpretation

Aspects treated in 1977 (a) The Intellectual Tradition Science and Society from Coper-

nicus to Freud (b) Liberalism and the challenge of Totalitarianism (c) The Search for International Order

Books Recommended for Purchase Bronnowski J amp The Western Intellectual Tradition (Harper

Mazlish B 1975) OR Stromberg R M

Carsten F L Curtiss J S

Marx K amp Engels F

Nmthedge F S amp Grieve M J

Robertson E M (ed)

Philosophy

General Note

An Intellectual History of Modern Europe (Appleton-Cenfury-Crofts 1966)

The Rise of Fascism (Methuen 1967) The Russian Revolution of 1917 (Anvil

1957) The Communist Manifesto (Pelican)

A Hundred Years of International Relations (Duckworth 1971)

The Origins of the Second World War (Macmillan 1971)

Onesubject only is offered in First Year and Fourth Year but two subjects are offered in Second Year and Third Year of which students may take one or both For each subject there will be two examination papers

To enrol in Fourth (Honours) Year students should have completed at least four Philosophy subjects and obtained at least Credit grading In addition to course work Fourth Year students will write a thesis In other years essays and exercises will be part of the years work

133

381100 Philosophy I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Nil

3-4 hours per wee~

See below

Section 1 Inboduction to Philosophy Section 2 Logic and Options Section 3 Seminars

section I 381101 Introduction to Philosophy (Dr Dockrill)

Hours

Examination

1 hour per week

One 3-hour paper

Content (i) Platos theory of political activity morality the nature of Te soul and its immortality and universals (ll) Descart~s quest or infallible knowledge his theory of innate ideas and hIS attempt tf prove the existence ~f God and the immaterial character of the sou Sectiop 1 will continue throughout the year

Texts Descartes

Plato

References Burnet J Guthrie W K C

Kenny A Taylor A E

Section 2 381103

Hours

Philosophical Writings (Anscombe amp Geach (edsraquo (Nelson)

The Last days of Socrates (Penguin)

Greek Philosophy (Macmillan) The Greek Philosophers (Methuen) Socrates (Cambridge UP) Descartes (Random House) Plato the Man and his Work (Methuen)

Logic and Options

2 hours pel week

Content First half-year Introduction to Logic ~Dr Robl~son) Assumes no prior acquaintance with logic and 1Otroduc~s stu~ents to a formal study of validity of arguments as encoun~ere~ 10 philO~-

h and elsewhere Topics include truth and lDlIlicatlOn e t~cture of propositions and arguments class and logIcal relatlOns

134

Texts Nil Lecture notes with further references will be issued

Examination An examinaton in Term II For those disshysatisfied with their result a further examin-ation in November

Second and Third Terms two of a series of options

Examination One 3-hour paper for the 2 options

Content (a) Basic Symbolic Logic (Dr Lee) (b) Scientific Method (Dr Robinson) (e) Introduction to Ethics (Dr Lee) (d) Introduction to Political Philosophy (Mr Sparkes) Details of options will be provided during the first half-year choice should be discussed with members of the Department

Seetion 3 381104 Seminars (Mr Sparkes)

and

Hours Seminars are held approx fortnightly in Tenns I and II

Content Seminars are conducted in small groups and the programme is reshylated to the material of Section 1 Members of groups are expected to prepare papers and to develop acquaintance with problems and ways of discussing them As with essays marks awarded for papers will be included in the mark for the years work Credit is also given for performance as a group member

Faculty of Mathematics

Preliminary Notes The Department of Mathematics offers and examines subjects Each subject is composed of topics each topic consisting of about 27 lectures and 13 tutorials throughout the year Each of the Part I Part II and Part HI Mathematics subjects consists of four topics For Mathematics I there is no choice of topics for Mathematics IIA lIB lIe there is some cltojce available to students for Matheshymatics IlIA and IUB there is a wider choice No topic may be counted twice in making up distinct subjects (Students who passed some mathematics subjects before this arrangement of subjects was introduced should consult the transition arrangements set out on p155 of the 1970 Faculty of Arts handbook and p76 of the 1973

135

Faculty of Mathematics handbook Note that the code letters for the topics may vary slightly from year to year) The Part II subject Computer Sci~nce Ii is ta~ght and examined jointly by the Department of Electncal Ingmeenng and the Departshyment of Mathematics In Computer SC1ence II there 1S no chotce of topics

Progressive Assessment From time to time during the year students will be given assignments tests etc The students performance in this work will be taken into account in the following manner (a) For the implementation of By-law 5411 which deals with

unsatisfactory progress A copy of th1s By-law appears m the General Supplement supplied with this Handbook

(b) Where a students performance during the year has been better than his performance in ~e final e~anination then the former will be taken into account m determmmg hls final result On the other hang when a students performance ltluring the year has been worsethan his performance in the final ex~ination ~en his performance during the year will be ignored m determmmg his final result

PART I SUBJECT

661100 Mathematics I

PrereqUisites Nil

Hours

Examination

Content

4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week

Two 3-hour papers

Topics AN - Real Analysis AL - Algebra CA - Calculus NM - Numerical Mathematics

PART I TOPICS

Topic AN - Real Analysis

Prerequisites

Hours

Nil 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Content Real Numbers Sequences and series Functions of one real aria~le continuity differentiability integrability Power senes Taylor Senes

136

Text

References Apostol T Spivak M

Nil

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Blaisdell 1967) Calculus (Benjamin Inc 1967)

Topic AL - Algebra

Prerequisites

Hdurs

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to basic algebraic objects and ideas Matrices permutshytions complex numbers Linear Algebra vectorspaces homomorshyphisms matrices determinants algorithms for solution of equations rank nullity eigenvectors and eigenvalues applications various

Text Brisley W

References Liebeck H

Lipschutz S McCoy N

Tropper A M

A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley 1973)

Algebra for Scientists and Engineers (Wiley 1971)

Linear Algebra (Schaum 1968) Tntroduction to Modern Algebra (Allynamp

Bacon 1968) Linear Algebra (Nelson 1973)

Topic CA - Calculus

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour pcr week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Vector geometry in three dimensions Revision of differentiation and integration of polynomials and trigonometric functions Differentiation of rational functions and of implicit and parametrically defined functions Definition and properties of logarithmic exponential and hyperbolic functions Integration by parts and by substitution tech~ niques Integration of rational functions First order separableand linear differential equations Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients Conic sections and simple three-dimensionshyal geometry of curves and surfaces Partial differentiation Tangency

Text Nil

137

References

Apostol T

Ayres F Greenspan H D

amp Benney D J Hille E amp Salas S

Kaplan W amp Lewis D J

Calculus Vol 1 2nd edn (Ginn Blaisdell 1967)

Calculus (McGraw-Hill) Calculus - An Introduction to Applied

Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973) First Year Calculus (Ginn Blaisdell 1968)

(International Textbook Series) Calculus and Linear Algebra Vol 1 (Wiley

1970)

Topic NM - Numerical Mathematics

Prerequisites

Hours

Content

Nil

1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight

Introduction to computers flowcharts and Fortran coding Elementshyary data analysis calculations of sample moments of discrete distrishybutions and programming of these operations Introduction to statistical analysis and numerical analysis wjth computer illustrations The writing of successful computer programmes is a required part of this topic

Texts Blatt J M

or Bellamy C J amp

Whitehouse L G

and Hoel P G

References

Greenspan H D amp Benney D J

Ralston A

Wilkes M V

Basic Fortran IV Programming Version MIDITRAN (Computer Systems of Australia Pty Ltd 1969)

An Introduction to Computer Programming in Fortran (monecs Fortran) (Monash Vniv Computer Centre 1976)

IntrOduction to Mathematical Statistics 4th edn (Wiley 1971)

Calculus - An Introduction to Applied Mathematics (McGraw-Hill 1973)

A First Course in Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1965)

A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Cambridge VP 1971)

138

751100 Psychology I

Prerequisites

Hours

Examination

Content

Faculty of Science

Nil

3 lecture hours 1 hour practical session and 1 tutorial hour per week

One 3-hour paper and assessment of practicshyal work

A ~eneral introduction to psychology which includes such topics as SOCial psycholgy earnmg theory perception developmental psyshycho~oyeny physiological psychology theory of measurement and statlStIcs

Texts

Hilgard E R et al

OR Krech D et al

OR Morgan C T amp

King R A

Introduction to Psychology 6th edn (Harshycourt Brace Jovanovich 1975)

Elements of Psychology 3rd edn (Knopf 1974)

Introduction to Psychology 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1971)

Additional texts may be recommended

I I I I I I

--

I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I

I I I 1

I I I

I I I I j I

I I

~~I I

I $I